2016 Chrysler 300 owners manual - OwnersMan
2016
OWNER'S MANUAL
300
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don't drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner's Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner's Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner's Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title.
VIN Location
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartment.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS 1
WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .21 Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
ILLUMINATED ENTRY -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .21 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .22
To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .25 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .25 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Child-Protection Door Lock System -- Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .47 Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .61 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .99 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside 2 The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the Key Fob against the engine START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start, ON/RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 -- OFF 2 -- ACC (ACCESSORY) 3 -- ON/RUN
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in 2 the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead. The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
When opening the driver's door when the ignition is in ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
WARNING!
· Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmis- 2 sion into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in "OFF" mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
· Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. · Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition in the OFF position and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
SENTRY KEY
it indicates that someone tried to use an invalid Key Fob
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The the engine being shut off after two seconds.
2
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
or unlocked.
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the system.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Push Button possible by an authorized dealer.
Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are
CAUTION!
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank with an invalid Key Fob.
· Do not make modifications or alterations to the immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to the immobilization system may result in a loss of
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the system. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
security protection. · The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
· Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
· For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position.
NOTE: Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM -- IF EQUIPPED
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go 2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
START/STOP button for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and trunk release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro-
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
2. This device must accept any interference received, will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
including interference that may cause undesired op- and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
eration.
will flash.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved Rearming Of The System
by the party responsible for compliance could void the If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
user's authority to operate the equipment.
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8
cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
Security Alarm will rearm itself.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System
3. If any doors are open, close them.
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm: To Disarm The System
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is placed in the "OFF" position (refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information).
· Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods:
· Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:
· Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
· Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone (refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information).
· Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
· Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if equipped. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
· Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go START/STOP button (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
NOTE:
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
· The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk button on occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security System Manual Override
2
Security Alarm.
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
· When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior doors using the manual door lock plunger.
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. Tamper Alert
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
ILLUMINATED ENTRY -- IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped).
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
NOTE:
· The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the "Dome ON" position (extreme top position).
· The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the "Dome defeat" position (extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Unlock The Doors
Flash Lights With Lock
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
transmitter once to unlock the driver's door or twice the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This 2
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The current setting, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Under-
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
standing Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go" under "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver's door or all doors on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect. To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Doors
To Unlatch The Trunk
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go" under "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go" under "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH (24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Transmitter Battery Replacement
· The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic battery.
2
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will remain on.
· You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
NOTE:
· Perchlorate Material -- special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
· Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
by the system.
housing or the printed circuit board.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
Separating The RKE Transmitter Case
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over (battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the by the party responsible for compliance could void the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause user's authority to operate the equipment.
2
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves together.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
· The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
· Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter may reduce this range.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use Remote Start
· Vehicle Security Alarm not active
All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start: · Vehicle in PARK · Doors closed · Hood closed · Trunk closed · Hazard switch off · Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed) · Battery at an acceptable charge level · RKE panic button not pushed
· Ignition in OFF position
WARNING!
· Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
· Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.
· System not disabled from previous remote start event
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Remote Start Abort Message
To Enter Remote Start Mode
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
Push and release the REMOTE START button 2
start prematurely:
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-
· Remote Start Aborted -- Door Ajar
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
· Remote Start Aborted -- Hood Ajar
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
· Remote Start Aborted -- Trunk Ajar
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
· Remote Start Aborted -- Fuel Low
NOTE:
· Remote Start Disabled -- Start Vehicle To Reset
· If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
The instrument cluster message stays active until the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
· The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
· For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
· The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the START/STOP button.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless EnterN-Go feature, the message "Remote start active - Push start button" will display in the Instrument Cluster Display until you push the START button.
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
Cancel Remote Start
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following occur: · The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm. · Any engine warning lights come on.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle · Low Fuel Light turns on.
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the · The hood is opened.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
· The hazard switch is pushed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
· The shift lever is moved out of PARK.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
· The brake pedal is pushed.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
2
General Information
DOOR LOCKS
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
Manual Door Locks
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Door Lock Knob
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
· For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
· When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the "OFF" mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
2
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go" under "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks -- If Equipped
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission is placed in PARK.
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 MPH (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see your authorized dealer for service.
3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System -- Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll down the window, and open the door using the outside door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle's Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) without having to push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
· Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
· If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
· If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver's door automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front 2 passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver's door unlock preference setting ("Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" or "Unlock All Doors 1st Press").
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If "Unlock All Doors 1st Press" is programmed, all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver's door handle. To select between "Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" and "Unlock All Doors 1st Press," refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry. There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry vehicle.
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car and it does not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters outside the car, then the car will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
· The doors are locked manually using the door lock knobs.
· There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door handle.
· Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then close the doors.
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the deck lid, push the button on the right side of CHMSL (Center High Mounted Stop Light), which is located on the deck lid.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To Lock The Vehicle's Doors
With one of the vehicle's Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door 2 handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle's Passive Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless another one of the vehicle's Passive Entry RKE transmitters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the deck lid.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
· After pushing the door handle button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
· The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle's interior door panel.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
General Information
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WINDOWS
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio Power Windows
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
The window controls on the driver's door control all the 2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and door windows.
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Power Window Switches
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
WARNING! (Continued)
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an AUTOdown feature. Push the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
To stop the window from going all the way down during · Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection -- If Equipped
closure. If this happens, pull and hold the switch to 2 close the window manually.
Pull window up switch for at least a half of a second and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window during an auto-up operation, push or pull the window switch again.
To close the window part way, pull and hold the window switch briefly and release it when you want the window to stop.
NOTE:
· If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors and the rear sunscreen (if equipped). To disable the window controls and the rear sunscreen, push and release the window lockout button (setting it in the DOWN position). To enable the window controls and the rear sunscreen, push and release the window lockout button again (setting it in the UP position).
Window Lockout Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Wind Buffeting
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of button will operate.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
2
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pushing the TRUNK button on the Remote
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds or by using the external release switch
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
Trunk Release Button
located on the underside of the decklid overhang. The release feature will function only when the vehicle is in the unlock condition.
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
pushing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information on trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young children may not be able to escape, even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Internal Release
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
Some of the most important safety features in your child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
vehicle are the restraint systems:
move the seat as far back as possible and use the 2
proper child restraint. (Refer to "Child Restraints")
· Seat Belt Systems
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
· Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
seat belt properly (Refer to Child Restraints) should
· Child Restraints
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-
Important Safety Precautions
dren who do not use child restraints or belt-
Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
possible.
them or under their arm.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance.
WARNING!
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
· Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buck-
be belted at all times. Driver And Passenger BeltAlert -- If Equipped
led. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not 2 active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with BeltAlert Warning Sequence
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when- vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
ever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un-
position.
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
Initial Indication
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
turned to the START or ON/RUN position, an intermit- has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
tent chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
· Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
· In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING! (Continued) · It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in 2 these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. · Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. · Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. · Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
(Continued)
(Continued)
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. · A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won't be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. · A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can't straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you. · A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. · A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren't as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
· A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and 2 pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the the latch plate.
2
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position.
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
· ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant's body is LESS than 6 inches.
· Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 2
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to "Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt" under the "Child
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Restraints" section of this manual. The table below If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap 2 around the occupant's mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant's mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
· ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
· Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
· The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
· Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
· Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING! (Continued)
· Supplemental Side Air Bags
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing · Supplemental Knee Air Bags
child restraints that have a harness for restraining · Front and Side Impact Sensors
2
the child.
· Seat Belt Pretensioners
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
· Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag System Components
· Seat Track Position Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components:
Advanced Front Air Bags
· Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
· Air Bag Warning Light
belt restraint systems. The driver's Advanced Front Air
· Steering Wheel and Column
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
· Instrument Panel
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
· Knee Impact Bolsters
words "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" are embossed on the air bag covers.
· Advanced Front Air Bags
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 -- Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 -- Passenger Knee Impact Bolster 3 -- Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
· Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
· Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
WARNING!
· No objects should be placed over or near the air 2 bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
· Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.
· Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
(Continued)
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) some collisions, air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage -- for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu- Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the 2
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
Air Bags.
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
WARNING!
Advanced Front Air Bags.
· Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way.
· Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Side Air Bags Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags: 1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with a "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback's trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG."
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
WARNING!
· Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.
· Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
The SABICs and SABs ("Side Air Bags") are designed to help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller ("ORC") de- occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit 2 termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate, be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle that is appropriate for the size of the child.
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
· Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
· Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
· Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
(Continued)
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten- deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
sioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags,
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by 2 contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed
near rollover event.
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
· As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
the air bag system.
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
· The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE:
· Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
· After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
· Cut off fuel to the engine.
· Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button.
· Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power.
· Unlock the power door locks.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System The ORC contains a backup power supply system that 2
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Air Bag Warning Light
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.
system electrical components.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfuncthe air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
· The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position.
· The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.
· The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won't have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System ("SRS"), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to the "Instrument Panel" section of this manual.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
· Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
WARNING! (Continued) · It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who 2 works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. · Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
(Continued)
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
· How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
· Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
· How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
· How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a 2 projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child's size.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner's Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner's Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
NOTE:
· For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-732-8243.
· Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada's website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/ eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafetyindex-53.htm
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child re-
straint
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint 2 Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle's seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
· Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle's seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's seat cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
· Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
2
· After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
· When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
(Continued)
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle's seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child's knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child's shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child's thighs and not their stomach?
If the answer to any of these questions was "no," then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child's squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Restraint Type
Combined
Use any attachment method shown with an "X" Below
2
Weight of the
LATCH
Seat Belt Only
LATCH
Seat Belt + Top
Child + Child Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors Tether Anchor
Restraint
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing
Up to 65 lbs
X
X
Child Restraint
(29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing
More than
X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
X
Forward-Facing
More than
X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle's seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
2
· Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
· Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No
Never "share" a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints. 2
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchor-
ages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
The child seat may touch the back
touch the back of the front passen-
of the front passenger seat if the
ger seat?
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child re-
straint owner's manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
Center position only may be re-
moved.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating Tether Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
2
rear seating position located in the panel be-
tween the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt" to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to "Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System" for typical installation instructions.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) 2 in any direction.
to allow more room for the child seat.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
ing position.
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
top tether anchorage. See the section "Installing Child with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for direc- installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
tions to attach a tether anchor.
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
the child's reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
them.
Belt
WARNING!
· Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
· Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be "switched" into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the "Automatic Locking Mode" description under "Occupant Restraints" for additional information on ALR.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Restraints in this Vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
2
· ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor · Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a for-
ward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
Contact between the front passen-
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat and the child restraint is
ger seat?
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be re-
Yes
Center Only may be removed.
moved?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
No
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR re-
tractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract 2 back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
You may also move the front seat forward to allow bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
more room for the child seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor lap portion around the child restraint while you push
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. the child restraint rearward and downward into the
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
vehicle seat.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
strap. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage
WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section "Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System" for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
2
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
1 -- Cover 3 -- Attaching Strap
A -- Tether Strap Hook B -- Tether Anchor
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child 2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head
restraint manufacturer's instructions.
restraint.
WARNING!
· An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
· If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the center tether anchorage located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Center Tether Attachment
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. 1. Lower the adjustable center head restraint to the full
down position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
CAUTION!
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil 2
in the engine or damage may result.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- SAFETY TIPS
mental and should be avoided.
Transporting Passengers
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO changes should be consistent with anticipated climate AREA.
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
"Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle."
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
· It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: · Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. · If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
WARNING! (Continued)
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
· If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling Seat Belts
2
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
blower at high speed.
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, Air Bag Warning Light
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. · Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners. · Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
· Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning. · Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. · If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle
Tires
2
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS 3 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Power Folding Outside Mirrors -- If
Automatic Dimming Mirror -- If Equipped . . .112
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Heated Mirrors -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .122
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature -- If
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors -- If Equipped . . .122
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 "Slide-On-Rod" And Extender Features Of Sun
Driver's Automatic Dimming Mirror -- If
Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) -- IF
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Lighting -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse -- If Equipped . . . . . . .120 Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .150
Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Power Lumbar -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Heated Seats -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Automatic Headlights -- If Equipped . . . . . . .153
Front Ventilated Seats -- If Equipped . . . . . . .140 Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT -- IF EQUIPPED . . . .146 Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .147 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge Headlights -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Daytime Running Lights (DRL). . . . . . . . . . . .156
Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Fog Lights -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 3
High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Rain Sensing Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Front Map/Reading Lights -- If Equipped . . .159 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 COLUMN -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Ambient Light -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .164 Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
HEATED STEERING WHEEL -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .172
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .186
To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .181 Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .182 To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .193 Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .194 Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .197 General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
MITIGATION -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .205
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .225
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .208 Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . .226 3
FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .227
Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .227
LANESENSE -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA -- IF
LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF. . . . . . . . . . . .210 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
LaneSense Warning Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Front Map/Reading Lights -- If Equipped . . .232
Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST --
Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 GARAGE DOOR OPENER -- IF EQUIPPED . . .234
ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .235
Closing Sunroof -- Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .245
Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Opening Power Shade -- Express . . . . . . . . . .245
Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .238 Opening Power Shade -- Manual Mode . . . . .245
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .239 Closing Power Shade -- Express . . . . . . . . . . .245
Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Closing Power Shade -- Manual Mode . . . . . .246
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Venting Sunroof -- Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Opening Sunroof -- Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Opening Sunroof -- Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .244 Closing Sunroof -- Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .247 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Rear Seat Cupholders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Trunk Mat -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Grocery Bag Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 3
Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Rear Seat Armrest Storage -- If Equipped . . . .258 Power Sunshade -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .262
Cargo Area -- Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED . .263
Split-Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror -- If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
· The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear view viewing.
· The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a 9-1-1 button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
WARNING!
ASSIST Call
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1 and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers:
· Roadside Assistance If you get a flat tire, or need a 3
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
tow, just push the Assist button and you'll be con-
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
NOTE:
will know what vehicle you're driving and its location.
· Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
by the subscriber.
· Uconnect Access Customer Care In-vehicle support
· The 911 and ASSIST buttons will only function if you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile features.
3G(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only · Vehicle Customer Care Total support for all other
be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active vehicle issues.
and you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
9-1-1 Call
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error, there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the 9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror or push the cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1 buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1 operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 operator: · Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call. · The vehicle brand. · The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1 and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
· Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
· Once a connection is made between the vehicle's 9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle's 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle's 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
WARNING!
· If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from a 3 9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
· Never place anything on or near the vehicle's operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/ data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
· The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle's electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
(Continued)
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
electrical equipment to the vehicle's electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle's electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE. · Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1 Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
· The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
· The Device Screen will display the following message "Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer."
· An In-Vehicle Audio message will state "Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer."
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
WARNING!
· Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
· The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the ORC system immediately.
· Delayed accessories mode is active.
· The ignition is in the OFF position.
· The vehicle's electrical systems are not intact. · The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are 3
damaged during a crash.
· The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
· Operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
· Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
· Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors beyond FCA US LLC's control may prevent or stop the 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors:
· Operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network congestion.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· Weather.
General Information
· Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1 and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle's operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. Operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will Driver's Automatic Dimming Mirror -- If Equipped
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dim-
lane next to your vehicle.
ming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight
WARNING!
glare when the inside mirror adjusts. 3
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
NOTE: This feature is also available on the passenger's side when equipped with turn signal and approach lighting.
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach Lighting -- If Equipped
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
and approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature -- If Equipped
located in the upper outer corner of each mirror.
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and normal.
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting, which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles. It also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of the doors.
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the ignition is placed into the RUN position.
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the gear selector is moved out of the PARK position.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse -- If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver's view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
The power mirror controls are located on the driver's tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
door trim panel.
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
the mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate indi- 3
cating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
Power Mirror Control
Power Folding Outside Mirrors -- If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pushing the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the normal driving position.
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors -- If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they will automatically unfold.
Heated Mirrors -- If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to "Rear Window Features" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
"Slide-On-Rod" And Extender Features Of Sun Visor
To use the "Slide-On-Rod" feature of the sun visor, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is parallel to the side window, grab the sun visor and pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
3
Slide-On-Rod Feature
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) -- IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
3
· The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-
tection zones.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
· The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer to "Modes Of Operation" for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
Entering From The Side
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
3
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
3
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicle's mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians,
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where the vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, will alert the driver.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver. When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the 3 driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path (RCP) is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will be reduced.
NOTE:
· Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio volume is reduced.
· If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Blind Spot Alert Off
2. The device must accept any interference received,
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
systems.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
3
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and SEATS
used.
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
General Information
vehicle.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
WARNING!
· It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
(Continued)
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats
On models equipped with power seats, the switches are located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use these switches to move the driver's seat up or down, forward or rearward or to recline the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 -- Seat Control 2 -- Seatback Control -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
WARNING!
· Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
· Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
· Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if 3 movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
· Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
· Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
· Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.
Power Lumbar -- If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the Heated Seats -- If Equipped
power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to On some models, the front and rear seats may be
increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar seatbacks.
support.
3
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated
using the Uconnect System.
Power Lumbar Switch
WARNING!
· Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.
(Continued)
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for OFF.
· Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting ON.
· Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the LO setting ON.
· Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements OFF.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
· Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.
· The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting 3 in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
WARNING!
· Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.
(Continued)
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these seats are located on the rear of the center console. There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for OFF.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· Push the heated seat button once to select HI-level heating.
· Push the heated seat button a second time to select LO-level heating.
illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Front Ventilated Seats -- If Equipped
· Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements OFF.
NOTE:
· Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
· The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
· Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
· Press the ventilated seat button a second time to choose LO.
· Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad- 3 justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding rear of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to
Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
gain additional clearance to the back of your head.
Head Restraints
Reactive Head Restraints -- Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants head and the RHR.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not return to their normal position see your authorized dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go then push the release button and the adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
Adjustment Button
1 -- Release Button 2 -- Adjustment Button
WARNING!
· A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.
· ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
· Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Rear Head Restraints
The center head restraint has two adjustable positions, up or down. When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised position. When there are no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be 3 lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Adjustment Button
NOTE:
· The head restraint should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If the center rear head restraints requires removal, see your authorized dealer.
· The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on the loops located on the upper seatback.
NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
3
Rear Seatback Loop After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
Folded Rear Seatback
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
· The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT -- IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pushed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters, one RKE transmitter can be linked to memory position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to memory position 2.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
The memory seat switch is located on the driver's door Programming The Memory Feature trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The (S) To create a new memory profile, perform the following: button, which is used to activate the memory save function and the (1) and (2) buttons which are used to 1. Place the ignition into the RUN position. recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles. 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer- 3
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column [if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the S (Set) button on the memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the memory buttons (1) or (2). The Driver Information Display (DID) will display which memory position has been set.
Memory Seat Switch
NOTE: Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you must select the "Memory To FOB" feature through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the Off position.
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). The system will recall any stored settings for this profile. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer to Programming The Memory Feature in this section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. "Memory Profile Set" (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster.
4. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
Memory Position Recall
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
in PARK, a message will display in the DID (if equipped). vehicle.
3
To recall the memory settings for driver one, push The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
MEMORY button number (1) on the driver's door or the you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to vehicle's ignition to the OFF position.
memory position 1.
· When you cycle the vehicle's ignition to the OFF
To recall the memory setting for driver two, push position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60
MEMORY button number (2) on the driver's door or the mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
memory position 2.
stop. The seat will return to its previously set position
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver's door during a recall.
when you cycle the vehicle's ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat, adjustable · The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steer- driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm)
ing column (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully 3 closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
Hood Safety Latch
Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in the open position.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.
Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Automatic Headlights -- If Equipped
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off Automatic Headlights Only)
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature 3
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic this feature.
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights "Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features"
will come on in the automatic mode.
in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further
Parking Lights
information.
Headlight Time Delay
Turn the headlight switch knob to the first detent This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
to turn the parking lights on. This also turns on all for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
instrument panel lighting.
vehicle in an unlit area.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
· The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this feature.
· The headlight delay time is programmable using the Uconnect System, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control -- If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
· The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
· Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera To Deactivate
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
If the windshield or forward facing camera module is in vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal
replaced, the camera must be re-calibrated to ensure proper system performance. See your local authorized
operation of low beams).
3
dealer.
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
system.
To Activate
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight Headlights -- If Equipped
position.
This system automatically swivels the headlight beam
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
the direction the vehicle is steering.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is turned on, the headlights will initialize by performing a brief sequence of rotations.
· The Adaptive Headlight System is active only when the vehicle is moving forward.
The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned On or Off using the Uconnect System, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver's door is opened.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when the engine starts, headlights are off, and the parking brake is off. The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Fog Lights -- If Equipped
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
switch.
headlight switch.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
3
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and push the
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
· A "Turn Signal On" message will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Front Map/Reading Lights -- If Equipped
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever head console.
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. 3
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is released.
Front Map/Reading Lights
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on either side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night time visibility. To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is pushed.
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a second time.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
Ambient Light -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Interior Lights
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil- To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
ity of the floor and center console area.
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to 3
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Ambient Light
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if equipped).
Dimmer Controls
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Ambient Light Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Dome Light Position
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
increase or decrease the brightness of the door handle second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights and ambient light located in the overhead console. lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
3
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom "OFF" position. The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer, Driver Information Display (DID), and radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Intermittent Wiper System
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
· Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off.
· In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the "Park" position before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
· Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Mist Feature
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction 3 lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Rain Sensing Wipers
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi- NOTE:
tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions. Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
· The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper speed is in the low or high position.
desires more sensitivity. The rain sense wipers will · The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when 3
automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of moisture that is sensed on the windshield. Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the
· Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance.
system.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the following conditions:
"Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further in- · Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit -- The Rain Sensing
formation.
feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in
the RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h) or
the outside temperature rises above freezing.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· Neutral Wipe Inhibit -- The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position, the automatic transmission gear selector is in the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or the gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
· Remote Start Mode Inhibit -- On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause 3 the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN -- IF EQUIPPED
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering column switch is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver's door trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in this section.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Switch
To tilt the steering column, move the switch up or down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the switch toward you or push the switch away from you as desired.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
HEATED STEERING WHEEL -- IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps steering wheel to operate.
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to 130 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer
3
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instru-
when the steering wheel is already warm.
ment Panel" for further information.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
· Press the heated steering wheel button turn the heating element ON.
once to
· Press the heated steering wheel button a second time to turn the heating element OFF.
WARNING!
· Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
(Continued)
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS -- IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position. If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, it will allow you to adjust the brake and accelerator pedals toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel.
The switch is located on the front side of the driver's seat cushion side shield.
Adjustable Pedals Switch Push the switch forward to move the pedals forward (toward the front of the vehicle).
Push the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward (toward the driver). · The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
· The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Driver Information Display (DID) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out ("Adjustable Pedal Disabled -- Cruise Control Engaged" or "Adjustable Pedal Disabled -- Vehicle In Reverse").
NOTE:
· Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full pedal travel.
· Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the best possible seat/pedal position.
· For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver's door trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
positions. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
CAUTION!
3
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal's path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving. You could lose control and have an accident. Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 -- ON/OFF 2 -- SET+/ACCEL 3 -- RESUME
4 -- SET-/DECEL 5 -- CANCEL
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
WARNING!
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. 3
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired You could lose control and have an accident. Always
vehicle set speed.
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
· Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
3
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de- · Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control.
WARNING!
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) -- IF EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. Electronic Speed Control function performs differently. Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
NOTE:
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
· If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode selected.
· If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons. The two control modes function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.
3
preset following distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
· Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles.
· Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver's responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
· Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer to "Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode" in this section.
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
(Continued)
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. · The ACC system: · Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). · Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions. · Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings. · Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle does not start moving within two seconds the ACC system will display a message that the system will release the brakes and that the brakes must be applied manually. An audible chime will sound when the brakes are released. You should switch off the ACC system: · When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones). · When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes. · When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes. · When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
3
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 -- NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF 2 -- SET+/ACCEL 3 -- RESUME 4 -- SET-/DECEL 5 -- DISTANCE SETTING -- INCREASE 6 -- ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF 7 -- DISTANCE SETTING -- DECREASE 8 -- CANCEL
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, the Driver Information Display (DID) displays "ACC Ready."
When the system is OFF, the DID displays "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off."
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions: · When you apply the brakes. · When the parking brake is set. · When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE or NEUTRAL. · When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range. · When the brakes are overheated. · When the driver door is open. · When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays "ACC Ready."
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
3
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this time, the system will turn off and the DID will display "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off."
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
(Continued)
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) want. You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID will display the set speed.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
· The message "DRIVER OVERRIDE" will display in the DID.
· The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Cancel The following conditions cancel the system: · The brake pedal is applied. · The CANCEL button is pushed. · An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs. · The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
· The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- · The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
ON/OFF button is pushed.
· The vehicle parking brake is applied.
· The ignition is turned off.
· Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
· The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is 3
· Driver door is opened at low speeds.
pushed.
NOTE:
To Resume
· If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume) button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake pedal. The DID will display the last set speed.
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
NOTE:
· ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:
· If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the DID.
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
3
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting -- Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane, the DID displays the "Sensed Vehicle Indicator" icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting -- Increase button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
· The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed.
· The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor.
· The distance setting is changed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
· The system disengages. (Refer to the information on ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
3
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert "BRAKE" will flash in the DID and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity.
Brake Alert
NOTE: The "Brake!" Screen in the DID is a warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying the brakes autonomously.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtake Aid
U.S. Speed (mph)
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on the left hand side.
To Vary The Speed Setting
· Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID.
To Increase Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
· Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by · Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
pushing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
3
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Under- · If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel" for more information. continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
flected in the DID.
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the DID.
NOTE:
· When you override and push the SET + button or SET - buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed of the vehicle.
· When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the engine's braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two seconds the driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
· The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
ACC Operation At Stop
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the DID and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the DID and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Ready."
3 Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Off."
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following: · System Cancel · Driver Override · System Off · ACC Proximity Warning
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· ACC Unavailable Warning
· The DID will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
"Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle" Warning
The "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display "ACC/ FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" and the system will deactivate.
The "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is still available. For additional information refer to "Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode" in this section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- When the condition that deactivated the system is no
tant to note the following maintenance items:
longer present, the system will return to the "Adaptive
· Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens.
Cruise Control Off" state and will resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
3
· Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment.
· If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
· Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.
· If the "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer.
· Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
"Clean Front Windshield" Warning
The "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" warning will display and also a chime will
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the DID will display "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" and the system will have degraded performance.
The "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" message can sometimes be displayed while driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the DID displays "ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required" or "Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required", there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Precautions While Driving With ACC 3
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
3
Lane Changing Example
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Narrow Vehicles
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
General Information
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency Mode
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) 3
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
2. The device must accept any interference received, operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
including interference that may cause undesired op- To change between the different control modes, push the
eration of the device.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (chang-
ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol mode.
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the · If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Under- continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
standing Your Instrument Panel" for more information. button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of in the DID display.
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
To Decrease Speed
3
U.S. Speed (mph)
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
· Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Under-
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will standing Your Instrument Panel" for more information.
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
in the DID display.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Metric Speed (km/h)
· Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
· Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
· Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
· The brake pedal is applied.
· The CANCEL button is pushed.
· The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
· The vehicle parking brake is applied.
· The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the DID display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the memory:
· The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
To Turn Off
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in MITIGATION -- IF EQUIPPED
memory if:
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
· The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control Operation
3
ON/OFF button is pushed.
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
· The ignition is turned off.
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the DID), and may apply a brake
· The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal
pushed.
collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended
to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required. If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event begins at a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the system may provide the maximum or partial braking to mitigate the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning surroundings.
message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
WARNING! 3
· The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
(2 km/h).
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
· The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
normal FCW activation and functionality.
· It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such Turning FCW ON Or OFF
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events NOTE: The default status of FCW is "On", this allows
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle. vehicle in front of you.
· The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If The forward collision button is located on the switch the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should panel below the Uconnect display.
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the FCW system OFF, push the forward collision button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
To turn the FCW system back ON, push the forward collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns off).
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Changing the FCW status to "Off" prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
Changing the Active Braking status to "Off" prevents the system from providing limited autonomous braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
The default status of FCW is the "Far" setting and the Active Braking is the "On" setting, this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away and it applies limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the "Near" setting, allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This setting provides less reaction time than the "Far" setting, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
NOTE:
fully available. Once the condition that limited the sys-
· The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down.
tem performance is no longer present, the system will return to its full performance state. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
· FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
Service FCW Warning
3
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away, If the system turns off, and the DID displays:
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.
· FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable screens.
FCW Limited Warning
· ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
· Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If the DID displays "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality" or "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind- LANESENSE -- IF EQUIPPED
shield" momentarily, there may be a condition that limits LaneSense Operation FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may not be The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be pro-
within the lane boundaries.
vided.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through the Driver Information Display (DID) to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the LaneSense system will monitor if the driver's hands are on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the driver when the driver's hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
The default status of LaneSense is "OFF".
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by The LaneSense button is located on the center stack
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
below the Uconnect display.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through the DID to prompt the driver to
To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the LaneSense button to turn the system ON (LED turns off). A "Lane Sense On" message is shown in the DID.
To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the LaneSense button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
3
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift condition through the Driver Information Display (DID).
7.0 Driver Information Display (DID) Screen -- If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
Left Lane Departure -- Only Left Lane Detected
· When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure when only the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure -- Both Lanes Detected
· When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is "armed" to provide visual warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
· For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
3
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator) · When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
· For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
· Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
The LaneSense system settings can be configured · The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
through the Uconnect system screen.
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
Follow these steps to change the LaneSense settings: 1. Push the "Controls" button on touchscreen located on
traction control system, electronic stability control, forward collision warning, etc.)
3
the bottom of the Uconnect display.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST --
2. Push the "Settings" button. 3. Push the "Safety & Driving Assistance" button.
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
configure the intensity of the torque warning and the up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) through the person- Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limita-
alization settings.
tions of this system and recommendations.
NOTE:
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
· When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these gear selector positions, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/ bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/ bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
ParkSense Display
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
Rear Park Assist
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has
been detected, the warning display will turn ON indicat-
3
ing the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle's distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
3 Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
Rear Distance
(inches/ cm)
Arcs -- Left
Arcs -- Center
Arcs -- Right
Audible Alert Chime
Radio Volume Reduced
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
None
None
None
None
No
79-59 inches (200-150 cm)
None
6th Solid
None
Single 1/2Second Tone (for rear cen-
ter only) Yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 inches (150-120
cm)
47-39 inches (120-100
cm)
None
None
5th Solid 4th Solid
None
None
Slow (for rear center
only)
Yes
Slow (for rear center
only)
Yes
39-25 inches (100-65
cm) None
3rd Flashing
None
Fast (for rear center
only) Yes
25-12
Less than
inches
12 inches
(65-30 cm)
(30 cm)
3
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Fast
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Continuous
Yes
Yes
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense Warning screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
left and/or right front region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle's distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the display will show a single arc in the center front region. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone when the 1st flashing arc appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
No Tone/Solid Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
3
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Distance (inches/cm)
Arcs -- Left Arcs -- Center Arcs -- Right Audible Alert
Chime Radio Volume
Reduced
Greater than 47 inches (120
cm) None None None None
No
WARNING ALERTS
47-39 inches (120-100 cm)
39-25 inches (100-65 cm)
None 4th Solid
None None
None 3rd Flashing
None None
No
No
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
25-12 inches (65-30 cm)
2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing
Fast
Yes
Less than 12 inches (30
cm) 1st Flashing 1st Flashing 1st Flashing Continuous
Yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an ob- ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the
stacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and Uconnect display.
brake pedal is applied.
3 When the ParkSense switch is pushed to dis-
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
able the system, the instrument cluster will
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime volume settings will not be accessible from the DID.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
display the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for approximately five seconds. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" for further information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the DID will display the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS, or the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to Reverse and the system has detected a faulted condition, the Driver Information Display (DID) will display a PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a car
graphic will be displayed with UNAVAILABLE at either the front or rear sensor location depending on where the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS, or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED messages if an object is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The car graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" for further information.
If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS appears in the Driver Information Display (DID) make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then · Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
an authorized dealer.
· When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
If the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message appears in the DID, see an authorized
will display "PARKSENSE OFF." Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
3
dealer.
on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
· Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
· When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument cluster will display "PARKSENSE OFF" for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
· ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
· Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
· Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
· ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. · The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
WARNING!
· Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. · Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA -- IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever 3 the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate. The image will be displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to "check entire surroundings" across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the vehicle's ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
When the Vehicle is shifted out of Reverse (with camera delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited and the last touchscreen appears again.
projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. The active guide lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
Zone Red Yellow Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m) 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION! (Continued) · To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom- 3 mended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
CAUTION!
· To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
(Continued)
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Front Map/Reading Lights -- If Equipped
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) and power sunroof switches may also be included, if equipped.
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night time visibility.
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The Courtesy Lights
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
pushed.
second time.
3
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunglasses Bin Door
GARAGE DOOR OPENER -- IF EQUIPPED
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a "push/push" design. Push the chrome pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the door to close.
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicle's battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.
Sunglasses Bin Door
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
system.
3
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE:
Overhead Console HomeLink Buttons NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.
· Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.
· If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener 1 -- Door Opener 2 -- Training Button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
3
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the "LEARN" or "TRAIN-
ING" button. On some garage door openers/devices
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with "Programming A Rolling Code" step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light. · If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
· To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels.
that require the transmitter signals to "time-out" after
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Non-Rolling Code)
several seconds of transmission. 3
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
follow these steps:
mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the time-out in the same manner.
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
release the button.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
3. Without releasing the button proceed with "Program- door or gate motor.
ming A Non-Rolling Code" step 2 and follow all 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. remaining steps.
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button, while you push and release ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE: · If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
· To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
release the button.
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
3. Without releasing the button proceed with "Canadian/Gate Operator Programming" step 2 and
erased. The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
3
follow all remaining steps.
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Using HomeLink
Troubleshooting Tips
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle.
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here are some of the most common solutions:
· Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener handheld transmitter.
· Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
· Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
· Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
· Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a "stop and reverse" feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE -- IF EQUIPPED
The CommandView sunroof switch is located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switch is located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
3
CommandView Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
WARNING! · Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
(Continued)
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. · In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured. · Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof -- Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and stop automatically. This is called "Express Open." During Express Open operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof -- Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Closing Sunroof -- Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati- Opening Power Shade -- Manual Mode
cally. This is called "Express Close." During Express To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward.
Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will The shade will open and stop automatically at the
stop the sunroof.
half-open position. Push and hold the shade switch
Closing Sunroof -- Manual Mode
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to 3
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed again.
closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again. Closing Power Shade -- Express
Opening Power Shade -- Express
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within one-half second and the shade will automatically open to the halfway position and stop automatically. Push the switch a second time from the halfway position and the shade will automatically open to the full open position and stop automatically. This is called "Express Open". During Express Open operation, any movement of the shade switch will stop the shade.
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the shade will close automatically from any position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade will close fully and stop automatically. This is called "Express Close". During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the shade.
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again will automatically close both the sunroof and shade completely.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof opening to the Vent position.
Closing Power Shade -- Manual Mode
Pinch Protect Feature
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed again.
Venting Sunroof -- Express
Push and release the Vent button within one-half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called "Express Vent", and it will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings/Customer
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instru-
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows ment Panel" for further information.
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
3
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Your vehicle is equipped with one 12 Volt (13 Amp)
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel.
power outlet on the instrument panel and one 12 Volt (10 Amp) power outlet in the center console that can be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories. The power outlets are
Ignition OFF Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
labeled with either a "key" or a "battery" symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a "key" are powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a "battery" are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times.
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: · All accessories connected to the "battery" powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge. · To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR knob and element must be used.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area on the center stack of the instrument panel.
Front Power Outlet
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could result.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power NOTE: If the Media Hub is in use, do not exceed the outlet located in the storage area of the center console. maximum power of 100 Watts (8 Amps) for the center
console power outlet. When the Media Hub is not in use, the outlet can deliver up to 120 Watts (10 Amps). If the power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system 3 will need to be replaced.
Center Console Power Outlet
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The instrument panel power outlet and dual rear console USB ports can be changed to "battery" powered all the time by moving the #12 20 Amp fuse from "IGN" to "B+". Refer to "Rear Power Distribution Center Cover" in "Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)".
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 -- #12 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Panel Power Outlet / Dual USB Charge Only Ports 2 -- #38 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Center Console Power Outlet / Media Hub
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death: · Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. · Do not touch with wet hands. · Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle. · If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
· Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
· Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
CAUTION! (Continued) · After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be 3 driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle's battery. · Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage.
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the center console.
Retractable Cover
Front Cupholders Heated And Cooled Cupholders -- If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled cupholders. The cupholders are designed to help keep warm beverages warm and cool beverages cool.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
WARNING!
When using the cupholder in the "Hot" position, avoid contact with the heated portion of the cupholder in order to reduce the possibility of burns. 3 Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injuries, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise particular care in order to prevent serious burn injury. Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects when operated in the "Hot" position. Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches Push the "Cold" symbol once to turn on the cupholder; Rear Seat Cupholders push the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off. The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest Push the "Hot" symbol once to activate the cupholder; between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned push the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder. forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant's elbows.
Lighted Cupholders -- If Equipped
On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer Control. Refer to "Lights" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
Rear Seat Cupholders
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
STORAGE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
Console Features
Glove Compartment
There is a cubby bin located forward of the gear selector.
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel.
The cubby bin is covered with a push-push actuated door. Push inward on the door to open it, push the door a second time to close it.
3
Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the center console armrest.
Glove Compartment
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
like tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 volt power outlet, USB and Aux jack are located here.
Center Console
Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an integrated coin holder, along with additional area for small items and handheld devices. Below the upper tray, the lower storage compartment is made for larger items,
Upper Storage Tray
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
Door Storage The door panels contain storage areas.
3
Front Door Trim Storage
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Armrest Storage -- If Equipped
For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage compartment.
Cargo Area -- Vehicles Equipped With 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous, nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap.
Rear Armrest Storage
WARNING!
· Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
· The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system.
· To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per- 3 sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle: · Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible. · Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway. · Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES Trunk Mat -- If Equipped A trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo area. The trunk mat is used to protect the interior of the trunk from mud, snow, and debris. Grocery Bag Hooks The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery bag hooks, located on either side of the rear cargo area.
Grocery Bag Hooks
CAUTION! Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 50 lbs (22 kg) of the grocery bag hook. Damage may occur to hook and mounting surface.
Cargo Net The rear cargo area is equipped with a cargo net.
Rear Cargo Net
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on 3 the climate control. Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, push the button a second time.
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: · Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. · Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. · Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Power Sunshade -- If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sunshade that will reduce the amount of sunlight that will shine through the rear windshield.
The power sunshade can be operated using the Uconnect System.
Push the "Controls" button and then push the "Rear Sunshade" button to raise the power sunscreen. Push the "Sunshade" button a second time to lower the sunshade.
If the sunshade is in the raised position and the vehicle is placed in REVERSE, the sunshade will automatically fully lower. When the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE the sunshade will automatically return to the fully raised position after a brief delay.
NOTE: The rear sunshade control switch can be locked out along with the rear passenger window controls from the driver switch window lockout switch.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
The power sunshade can also be operated by passengers LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED
in the rears seats. The power sunshade switch is located The automatic load leveling system will provide a level-
on the back of the center console between the heated seat riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
switches. Push the switch once to raise the sunshade. conditions.
Push the switch a second time to lower the sunshade.
3
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
Power Sunshade Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .268 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) -- If Equipped . . . .306 4
DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .271 CYBERSECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . .314
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .283 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
White Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .301
Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Customer Programmable Features -- Uconnect 8.4 Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
UCONNECT RADIOS -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .334
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .336
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE -- IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Introducing Uconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . .337 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .345 Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . .361 Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . .367
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
Siri Eyes Free -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 -- Air Outlet 2 -- Driver Information Display (DID) Controls 3 -- Instrument Cluster 4 -- Speed Controls 5 -- Uconnect System 6 -- Analog Clock
7 -- Glove Compartment 8 -- Uconnect System Hard Controls
9 -- Switch Bank 10 -- Climate Control Hard Controls 11 -- Engine Start/Stop Button 12 -- Trunk Release Button
13 -- Headlight Switch 14 -- Adaptive Cruise Control
15 --Uconnect Phone Controls
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
4
Premium Instrument Cluster
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Tachometer · Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Driver Information Display (DID) Display · When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows the Driver Information Display (DID) messages. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
3. Speedometer · Indicates vehicle speed.
5. Temperature Gauge · The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. · The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
4. Fuel Gauge · The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads "H" pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) remains on the "H", turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see "Maintaining Your Vehicle". Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative 4 to the information contained in the Owner Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Indicator Lights Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver's seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
Air Bag Warning Light
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is 4 first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
United States Canada
What It Means
Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is dropped below a specified level.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
the brake fluid level checked.
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
4
WARNING!
inspected by an authorized dealer.
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Security Warning Light -- If Equipped
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light -- If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will be sound for 4 minutes or until the engine is allowed to cool whichever comes first.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
"If Your Engine Overheats" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
4
Charging System Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's nonessential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer. If jump starting is required, refer to "Jump Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies."
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a 4 problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/ RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, place the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle speed or apply light foot pressure to increase the engine speed RPM until the Transmission Temperature light turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning -- If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Re-
fer to "Power Steering" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
4
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
Trunk Open Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Trunk Open Warning Light This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed. NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there a single chime will sound.
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights Rear Fog Light Indicator -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Rear Fog Light Indicator
4
This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on.
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result 4 in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light -- If Equipped
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light -- If Equipped The "ESC Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the "ESC Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 MPH (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. · The "ESC Off Indicator Light" and the "ESC Indicator Light" come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN. · Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously. · The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light -- If Equipped
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
With Drive Modes the ESC OFF indicator will be lit any time the Traction modes is set to
4
Sport, Track or Full OFF.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light -- If Equipped
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light -- If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving approximately one minute and then remain continuously
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- 4
the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not to continue to function properly.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked.
Low Fuel Warning Indicator Light
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Warning Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.8 gal (10.6 L), this light will turn on and a
4
single chime will sound.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light -- If Equipped
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light This light indicates a potential system fault with the FCW system. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
Service AWD Indicator Light -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Service AWD Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning
4
properly and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LaneSense Indicator Light -- If Equipped
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light The LaneSense system provides the driver with visual and steering torque warnings when the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane unintentionally without the use of a turn signal. · When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid green to solid yellow. · When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green to flashing yellow. Refer to "LaneSense - If Equipped in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service.
4
Please see your authorized dealer.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator Light -- If Equipped
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator Light This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Telltale Indicator Lights Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light -- If Equipped
Green Telltale Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light -- If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Green Telltale Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn
4
signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when
the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE: · A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on. · Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
Green Telltale Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET. Refer to "Electronic Speed Control" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
White Telltale Indicator Lights Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display Light -- If Equipped
White Telltale Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display Light -- If Equipped
This will display the distance setting for the ACC system. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
4
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On Light -- If Equipped
White Telltale Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On Light -- If Equipped This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is ON. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light -- If Equipped
White Telltale Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light -- If Equipped This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned on and in the READY state. Refer to "Electronic Speed Control" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light -- If Equipped
White Telltale Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light -- If Equipped This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is ON and the target vehicle is detected. Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information.
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights High Beam Indicator Light
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
Blue Telltale Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
4
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, flash to pass scenario.
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
· Speedometer
The Driver Information Display (DID) features an interactive display which is located in the instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pushing the arrow buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel. The DID Menu Items consists of the following:
· Vehicle Info · Driver Assist -- If Equipped · Fuel Economy · Trip · Audio
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Messages
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
· Screen Setup
The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:
Using the UP or DOWN arrows allows you to cycles through the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title area.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the LEFT or RIGHT arrow buttons allows you to cycles through the submenu items of the Main menu item.
DID Controls
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
NOTE:
· Within each submenu layer, the up/down arrows will
· Holding the UP/DOWN or LEFT/RIGHT arrow but- allow the user to select the item of interest.
tons will loop the user through the currently selected · Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a
menu or options presented on the screen.
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to
· Main menu and submenu's wrap for continuous the 1st page of the submenu).
scrolling.
· Pushing the LEFT arrow button will exit each sub- 4
· Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu menu layer and return to the main menu.
screen viewed within that main menu will be dis- For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new Perfor-
played.
mance Timers):
OK Button: For Digital Speedometer · Pushing the OK button changes units (MPH or km/h). For Screen Setup and Vehicle Settings: · OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus.
· Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK button.
Engine Oil Life Reset
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The "Oil Change Required" message will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK or arrow buttons. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The "Oil Change Required" message will display in the DID for five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
Use the steering wheel DID controls for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu to "Vehicle Info."
3. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to access the "Oil Life" screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
4. Push and hold the OK button to rest oil life. If Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display will update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a popup message of To reset oil life engine must be off with ignition in run will be displayed (for 5 seconds),
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
and the user will remain at the Oil Life screen.
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
5. Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow within 10 seconds.
4
button to exit the submenu screen.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) -- If Equipped
Display (DID) when the recommended gear shift point has been reached. This indication notifies the driver that changing gear will allow a reduction in fuel consumption.
DID Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the DID.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
Speedometer
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) Location
The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) system is enabled when the automatic transmission is in manual shift mode. The GSI provides the driver with a visual indication, (+ or -) beside the current gear, within the Driver Information
Push and release the OK button to toggle between MPH and km/h.
Vehicle Info The Vehicle Info consists of the following submenu: · Tire Pressure Monitor · Coolant Temp · Trans Temp · Oil Temp · Oil Pressure · Oil Life · Battery Voltage · AWD Status -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
Driver Assist
The Driver Assist menu provides the status and visuals about the Adaptive Cruise Control and LaneSense features. When they are both off the screen, the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and LaneSense Off Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu -- If Equipped 4
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The information displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Off."
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
· ACC Proximity Warning
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Ready."
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
ACC SET
· ACC Unavailable Warning
· The DID will return to the last display selected after five seconds of ACC display inactivity.
Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) -- If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following: · Distance Setting Change · System Cancel · Driver Override · System Off
LaneSense -- If Equipped
The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings. The information displayed depends on LaneSense system status. Push the LaneSense button (located on the center stack below the Uconnect display) until one of the following displays in the DID:
· LaneSense Off
· When LaneSense is deactivated, the display will read "LaneSense Off."
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
· Lane Sense On
The Max and Min values will correspond to the
· When LaneSense is activated, the display will read
particular engine requirements
"LaneSense On."
· Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber
Refer to "LaneSense -- If Equipped" in "Understanding color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information. · Hold the OK button to reset average fuel economy
Fuel Economy
information.
4
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button Trip Info
until the Fuel Economy Menu item is displayed in the Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
DID.
until the Trip Menu item is displayed in the EVIC.
· Two submenu pages one with Current value (instantaneous calculation of the fuel economy) displayed and one without the Current Value displayed (toggle left or right to select one):
Toggle the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the following:
· Distance Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l) for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Range To Empty (miles or km)
Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km) of Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
· Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Audio Menu displays in the DID.
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Messages Menu item is displayed in the DID. This feature shows the number of stored warning messages, if any. Pushing the RIGHT or LEFT
arrow button will allow you to scroll through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push and release the OK button to enter the submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed.
1. Upper Left · Compass · Outside Temp. · Time · Range to Empty (default) · Average L/100km (or MPG) · Current L/100km (or MPG) · Trip A Distance · Trip B Distance · None
2. Upper Right · Compass · Outside Temp (default) · Time · Range to Empty · Average L/100km (or MPG) · Current L/100km (or MPG) · Trip A Distance · Trip B Distance · None
3. Center · Menu Title (default) · Compass · Outside Temp. · Time · Range to Empty
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
· Average L/100km (or MPG)
· Current L/100km (or MPG)
· Trip A Distance
· Trip B Distance
· Audio Inform
· Digital Speed
4
· None
4. Current Gear · On · Off (default)
5. Odometer · Show (default) · Hide
6. Fuel Gauge · Standard (default) · Detailed
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Defaults · Ok · Cancel
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly.
software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require
· It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible outcomes if your vehicle's systems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
WARNING! (Continued)
· ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
· As always, if you experience unusual vehicle be-
· To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
· Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates. · Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
4
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
havior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
dealer immediately.
not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
NOTE:
information and private communications without your consent. For further information, refer to "Privacy Prac-
· FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding tices" in "All About Uconnect Access" in your Owner's
software updates.
Manual Radio Supplement and "Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity" in "Maintaining Your
Vehicle" in your Owner's Manual on the DVD.
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
UCONNECT SETTINGS
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument panel, push and hold the button until the setting is correct.
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Setting The Analog Clock
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 -- Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 -- Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the 4 control knob one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have a Screen Off and Back buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Touchscreen Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect Touchscreen.
CAUTION!
Do not attach any object to touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/ Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.
NOTE:
· Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
· Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary.
Customer Programmable Features -- Uconnect 8.4 Settings
Press the "Apps " button, then press the "Settings" button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting "option" until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the "X" button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or Headlights ON setting, the headlights must be on and
down through the available settings.
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or
Display
parade positions.
After pressing the "Display" button on the touchscreen · Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
the following settings will be available:
When in this display, you may select the brightness with 4
· Display Mode
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness from (110) with the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen.
When in this display you may select one of the display mode settings. To change Mode status, press and release the "Manual" or "Auto" button on the touchscreen.
· Display Brightness With Headlights ON
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights OFF setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions.
When in this display, you may select the brightness with · Set Theme
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness from (110) with
the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen.
When in this display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the Set
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Theme button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.
· Set Language
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.
· Control Screen Time-Out -- If Equipped
When in this display, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the "Set Language" button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
· Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the touchscreen) is pressed. Press the "Touchscreen Beep"
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed. Press the "Control Screen Time-Out" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.
· Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID) as
the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your selection, press the "Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
· Fuel Consumption
Select from: "MPG" (US), "MPG" (UK), "L/100 km" or "km/L." · Pressure
Units
Select from: "psi," "kPa," or "bar."
4
After pressing the "Units" button on the touchscreen you · Temperature
may select each unit of measure independently displayed Select from: "°C," or "°F." in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation system (if equipped). The following selectable units of Voice
measure are listed below: · Speed
After pressing the "Voice" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Select from: "MPH" or "km/h."
· Voice Response Length
· Distance Select from: "mi" or "km."
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length, press the "Brief" or "Detailed" button on the
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.
· Show Command List
When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the Show Command List settings, press the "Always," "With Help" or "Never" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.
the "Sync time with GPS" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.
· Set Time Hours
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The "Sync time with GPS" button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. To make your selection, press the "+" or "" buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or down.
Clock
· Set Time Minutes
After pressing the "Clock" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: · Sync Time With GPS -- If Equipped
This feature will allow you to automatically have the radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The "Sync time with GPS" button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. To make your selection, press the "+" or "" buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or down.
· Time Format
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
· Forward Collision Warning -- If Equipped
This feature will allow you to select the time format The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
display setting. Press the "Time Format" button on the audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected. Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
· Show Time In Status Bar -- If Equipped
means the system will warn you of a possible collision 4 with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
Status setting press the "Show Time in Status Bar" button setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
the FCW status, press and release the "Near" or "Far"
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the "Safety & Driving Assistance" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
button. For further information, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
able:
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Forward Collision Warning (FCW) -- Active Braking
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make your selection, press the "Forward Collision Warning Active Braking" button on the touchscreen, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. For further information, refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle."
· LaneSense Warning -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to provide either an "Early," "Medium," or "Late" warning zone start point.
For further information, refer to "LaneSense Warning (LDW)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
· LaneSense Strength -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures. The amount of directional torque the steering system can apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane departure can be set at "Low," "Medium" or "High."
For further information, refer to "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
· Steering Feel Options -- If Equipped
The Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to adjust the steering effort and feel. Press the "Sport" button on the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steering feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Press the "Normal" button on the touchscreen to provide "Sound and Display" button. Refer to "ParkSense" in
greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort. "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for sys-
Press the "Comfort" button on the touchscreen to provide tem function and operating information.
a balance of steering feel and steering effort.
· Front ParkSense Volume
· Paddle Shifters -- If Equipped
The Front ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be
When this feature is selected, the paddle shifters can be selected from the Uconnect System. The chime volume 4
enabled or disabled. Select the "Enable" or "Disable" settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory
button on the touchscreen.
default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selec-
· ParkSense -- If Equipped
tion, press the "Front ParkSense Vol." button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the indicating that the setting had been selected. ParkSense
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE will retain its last known configuration state through
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It ignition cycles.
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
· Rear ParkSense Volume
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be se-
ParkSense status, press and release the "Sound Only" or lected from the Uconnect System. The chime volume
settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the "Rear ParkSense Vol." button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
· Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your selection, press the "Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
· Blind Spot Alert -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in "Lights" mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When "Lights & Chime" mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When "Off" is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the "Off," "Lights" or "Lights & Chime" button on the touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. selected.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor · ParkView Backup Camera Delay alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification. · ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and 4
the previously viewed screen appears again. When the
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. "REVERSE" unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
display along with a caution note to "check entire sur- "PARK" or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
roundings" across the top of the screen. After five sec- To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the
onds, this note will disappear. To make your selection, "Controls" button on the touchscreen, the "settings"
press the "ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines" button on the touchscreen, then the "Safety & Driving
Assistance" button on the touchscreen. Press the
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
"Parkview Backup Camera Delay" button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or OFF.
· Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected and the wipers are on, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your selection, press the "Rain Sensing Auto Wipers" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
· Hill Start Assist -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control System" in "Starting And Operating" for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press the "Hill Start Assist" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Lights
After pressing the "Lights" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
· Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting, press the "+" or "-" button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval, and choose either 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds.
· Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, press the "+" or "-" button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
· Headlights With Wipers -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
· Daytime Running Lights -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap- whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. press the "Daytime Running Lights" button on the touch-
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, show-
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make ing that the setting has been selected.
4
your selection, press the "Headlights With Wipers" but- · Flash Lights With Lock ton on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that the setting has been selected. When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
· Auto Dim High Beams -- If Equipped
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con- or without the "Sound Horn on Lock" feature selected. To
ditions. To make your selection, press the "Auto High make your selection, press the "Flash Lights with Lock"
Beams" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
appears next to setting, showing that the setting has been next to setting, showing that the setting has been se-
selected. Refer to "Lights -- If Equipped" in "Under- lected.
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further infor-
mation.
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Doors & Locks
After pressing the "Doors & Locks" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: · Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened. To make your selection, press the "Auto Unlock On Exit" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
· Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without the "Sound Horn on Lock" feature selected. To
make your selection, press the "Flash Lights with Lock" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
· Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the door locks are activated with the RKE. To make your selection, press either the "Off," "1st Press," or "2nd Press" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
· Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To make your selection, press the "Sound Horn with Remote Start" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
· 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
When Driver Door is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver's door will unlock with the first
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter · Passive Entry -- If Equipped
UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger's doors. When All Doors is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter LOCK or UNLOCK buttons. To make
4
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the your selection, press the "Passive Entry" button on the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Refer
Unlocks "All Doors," all doors will unlock no matter to "Keyless Enter-N-Go" in "Things To Know Before
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If Starting Your Vehicle".
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks "Driver Door" is programmed, only the driver's door will unlock when the driver's door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks "Driver Door" is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver's door opening. If "Driver Door" is selected,
· Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob -- If Equipped
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver's seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
"Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob is set to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to unlock the door. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
Auto Comfort Systems -- If Equipped
After pressing the "Auto-On Comfort" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: · Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn ON. To make your selection, press the "Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start" button to select from "Off," "Remote Start" or "All Starts" until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the "Engine Off Options" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Easy Exit Seat -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Driver's seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off. To make your selection, press the "Easy Exit Seat" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
· Engine Off Power Delay
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Audio
When this feature is selected, the power window After pressing the "Audio" button on the touchscreen the
switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped), following settings will be available.
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if · Balance/Fade
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
4
Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the "+" or "-" to adjust, or tap the `C' icon to readjust to the center.
button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval, and choose from "0 seconds," "45 seconds," "5 minutes" or "10 minutes."
· Headlight Off Delay
· Equalizer
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the "+" and "" setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds touchscreen.
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
Delay status press the "+" or "" button on the touch- finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
screen to select your desired time interval.
directly on the desired setting.
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the "Off," "1," "2" or "3" button on the touchscreen. · Surround Sound -- If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the "Surround Sound" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off." · AUX Volume Offset -- If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match button on the touchscreen, choose a level from 3 to +3. · Loudness -- If Equipped
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the "Phone/Bluetooth" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: · Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the "Uconnect Supplement Manual." · Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the "Uconnect Supplement Manual."
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To make your selection, press the "Loudness" button on the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
SiriusXM Setup -- If Equipped
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
After pressing the "SiriusXM Setup" button on the touch- reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
screen, the following settings will be available:
the screen or visit the provider online.
· Channel Skip
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To make your selection, press the "Channel Skip" button on the
4
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip. Restore Settings
· Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the "Subscription Info" button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
After pressing the "Restore Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the "Restore Settings" button. A pop-up will appear asking Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?" select "OK" to restore,
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
"Cancel" or "X" to exit without making changes. Once the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating Settings reset to default.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the "Clear Personal Data Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove personal information, press the "Clear Personal Data" button and a pop-up will appear asking Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?" select "OK" to clear, "Cancel" or "X" to exit without making changes. Once the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating Personal data cleared".
System Information
After pressing the "System Information" button on the touchscreen the following information will be available: · System Information
When System Information is selected, a System Information screen will appear displaying the system software version.
UCONNECT RADIOS -- IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio, refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be plugged into the USB port.
The Media hub also allows the use of an SD card. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Located on the rear of the front center console are dual USB "Charge Only" ports.
4
AUX/USB/SD Card Ports 1 -- Aux Jack 2 -- USB Port 3 -- SD Card Slot
Rear USB Charging Ports
The USB "Charge Only" ports will recharge battery operated USB devices when connected.
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o'clock positions.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/ AUX/VES, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode.
Radio Operation
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Pushing the top of the switch will "Seek" up for the next
Wheel)
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will "Seek" down for the next listenable station.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
The button located in the center of the left-hand control 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE -- IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following precautions:
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
4
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
wiping from center to edge.
Under certain conditions, the mobile device being on in
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
or anti-static sprays.
not satisfactorily "clear" by the repositioning of the
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile device operation when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather. This system can be operated through either the controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect system display.
Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen
Buttons On The Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect screen.
When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display.
Automatic Climate Controls -- Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect system screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen) 1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to 4 switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls -- Buttons On The Touchscreen
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when ON.
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. AUTO Operation Button
6. Rear Defrost Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to "Automatic Operation" for more information.
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: · Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
CAUTION! (Continued)
· Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
· Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
9. SYNC
4
Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for warmer temperature settings.
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will 10. Blower Control automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven
Provides the passenger with independent temperature blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen as follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
· Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
· Bi-Level Mode
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con- Provides the driver with independent temperature con- 4
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera-
warmer air from the floor outlets.
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
· Floor Mode
temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler temperature settings.
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
and side window demister outlets.
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
· Mix Mode
time.
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions.
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
· If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if needed.
· If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
ON.
feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
4
Recirculation Control
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or and then turn off.
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button. The Automatic Operation
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is 1. Press the AUTO button on the faceplate or the AUTO
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tempera-
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle. ture Control (ATC) Panel.
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
· It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
· The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable feature. Refer to the "Uconnect System Settings" in this section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for proper coolant selection.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently Winter Operation
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually, Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months 4
temperature control will continue to operate automati- is not recommended because it may cause window
cally.
fogging.
Operating Tips
Vacation Storage
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
suggested control settings for various weather condi- (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
tions.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
Summer Operation
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility The engine cooling system must be protected with a of compressor damage when the system is started again. high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Outside Air Intake
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side windows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather.
NOTE:
· Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long periods, as fogging may occur.
· Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for filter replacement instructions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Manual Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
1. Press the "Apps " button to open the App screen.
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow these steps:
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/ shortcut on the main menu bar.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 8.4A/ 8.4AN system.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Main Menu
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing
instructions.
4
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
Uconnect 8.4AN
If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 8.4AN system. If not, you have a Uconnect 8.4A system.
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 -- Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text 2 -- For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For 8.4A/8.4AN Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate Functions. 3 -- Push To End Call
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say: · Cancel to stop a current voice session · Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands · Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system's status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
4 Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
· Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
· Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say "Help." The system will provide you with a list of commands.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
TIP: Press the "browse" button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
4
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
· Change source to Bluetooth
· Change source to iPod
· Change source to USB
· Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the "phonebook" button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say "Call," then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say "Call John Smith work."
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:
· Call John Smith
· Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
· Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
· Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the Phone button and say Listen. (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the Phone button . After the beep, say: "Reply."
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without me.
I'll be late.
Okay. Call me.
Where are you? I will be <num-
Are you there ber> minutes 4
yet?
late.
I'll call you later.
I'm on my way.
I need directions.
Can't talk right
See you in <number> of
minutes.
I'm lost.
now.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings 1 -- Select "Settings" 2 -- Select "Bluetooth" 3 -- Select the (i) for the paired vehicle 4 -- Turn on "Show Notifications"
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-
free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
4
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:
· Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
· Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when you know exactly how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate navigation at any time.)
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button the beep, say: " Find nearest coffee shop."
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After the beep, say:
· For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: "Enter state."
· For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: "Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan."
2. Then follow the system prompts.
. After
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN)
9-1-1 Call
WARNING!
Security Alarm Notification
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
Remote Vehicle Start**
4
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
Remote Horn and Lights Yelp Search
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access, press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on the next page.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States, Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
Voice Texting Roadside Assistance Call WiFi Hotspot*** **If vehicle is equipped. ***Extra charges apply.
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
Assist Button 2. Press the "Uconnect Care" button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your vehicle and handle all of the details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or, press the "Apps " button on the touchscreen to "Register By Web" to complete the process using your smartphone or computer.
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
You're only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
4
Mobile App To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the bottom of the app.
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Press the app you'd like to connect to your vehicle.
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and press Link.
5. Next time you're in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth, pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream your personalized music.
1. To send a message, push the Phone button . After the beep, say the following command: "Send message to John Smith."
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to process your message.
NOTE:
· You can also complete this process on the web. Simply visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
· Once you download the app to your compatible mobile device, you will also be able to start your vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually anywhere.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect what you'd like to do. For instance, if you're happy with your message, after the beep, say: "Send."
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a compatible MAP enabled smartphone to use your voice to send a personalized text message. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
4
iPhone Notification Settings
1 -- Select "Settings" 2 -- Select "Bluetooth" 3 -- Select the (i) for the paired vehicle 4 -- Turn on "Show Notifications"
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP:
1. Press the "Apps " button on the touchscreen.
· Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.
· Messages are limited to 140 characters.
2. Press the "Yelp" button on the touchscreen.
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen, push the VR button , then say: "YELP search."
· The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be 4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
illuminated to use the feature.
Uconnect the place or business that you'd like
Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)
Uconnect to find.
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your voice to search for the most popular places or things around you.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN)
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
4
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
· Show fuel prices
· Show 5 - day weather forecast
· Show extended weather
Yelp
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
Siri Eyes Free -- If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings, set reminders, and more. For further information go to the Mopar Owner Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.
SiriusXM Travel Link
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
Automatic reply messages can be:
General Information
· "I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly." This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
· Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac-
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
ters.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
4
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected sired operation.
so you can still place a second call without being inter- NOTE:
rupted by incoming calls.
· The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC
NOTE:
and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
· Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
· Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
· The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Additional Information
Uconnect System Support:
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) for U.S. residents call: 1-877-855-8400 or visit DriveUconnect.com.
Canadian residents (English) call: 1-800-465-2001 Canadian residents (French) call: 1-800-387-9983 or visit DriveUconnect.ca.
Mon. Fri., 8:00 am 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed
Uconnect Access Services Support: 1-855-792-4241 Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .383 Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .384 5
Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 AUTOSTICK -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Extreme Cold Weather (Below 22°F Or -30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER -- IF EQUIPPED . . .381 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .381
SPORT MODE -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .394 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) -- IF EQUIPPED . .394 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .395
Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .410
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .410
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .403
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .403 Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . .405 Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .415 Ready Alert Braking (RAB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Rainy Brake Support (RBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .420 Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .422 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .423 TIRES -- GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .428 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .431 General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 3.6L Engine -- If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Run Flat Tires -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 5.7L Engine -- If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Spare Tires -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 5
Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .452
Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .440 Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .442 Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .443
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .460
VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .462 Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .462 Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive . . . . . .476
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
WARNING!
· Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
· When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in "OFF" mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
WARNING! (Continued)
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. · Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. · Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
Automatic Transmission The gear selector must be in the PARK position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
CAUTION! (Continued) · Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed: · Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed. · Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop. · Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
5
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go Key Fob is
in the passenger compartment.
(Continued)
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once, the DID will display a "Vehicle Not In Park" message and the engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
4. If the shift lever/gear selector is in Neutral, push and 1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position:
release the ENGINE START/STOP button with the vehicle speed below 5mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change the ignition to the ACC position.
in the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN to change the ignition to the RUN position.
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in 4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 return the ignition to the OFF position.
5
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below 22°F Or -30°C)
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions -- With Driver's Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, RUN. To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
· Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
· Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
· If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to "Jump-Starting" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.
After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER -- IF EQUIPPED
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution.
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
WARNING!
5
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that is located near the air box.
· It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued) · Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and make sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode. Remove the Key Fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. When the keyless ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. · Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. · When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the "OFF" mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. · Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
CAUTION!
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow- the transmission in PARK.
ing precautions are not observed: · Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop. · Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed. · Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift 5 Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic gear selector located on the center console. The transmission gear range (PRNDL/S) is displayed both above the gear selector and in the Driver Information Display (DID). To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. To access the L or S position, push down on the gear selector and then rotate it. You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped. To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.
Standard Gear Selector
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
Premium Gear Selector With AutoStick
The standard transmission gear selector has PARK, RE- The premium transmission gear selector provides PARK,
VERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT shift posi-
Using the LOW position manually downshifts the trans- tions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick
mission to a lower gear based on vehicle speed.
shift control (shift paddles mounted on the steering
wheel). Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the
DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select the trans-
mission gear, and will display the current gear in the 5
instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to "AutoStick" in
this section for further information.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
Gear Selector
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
· Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
· Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
· It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
WARNING! (Continued) · Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and make sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode. Remove the Key Fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. When the keyless ignition is in the "OFF" mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. · Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
· Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
5
NOTE:
· Before moving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must start the engine and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result.
· DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain.
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicator should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
· With brake pedal released, look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting And Operating" and "Towing A Disabled Vehicle" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
DRIVE (D)
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris- SPORT (S) -- If Equipped
tics under all normal operating conditions.
This mode alters the transmission's automatic shift 5
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are in-
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- creased to make full use of available engine power. To
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or access SPORT mode, push down on the gear selector and
while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift rotate it fully clockwise, or push the SPORT button in the
control (if equipped; refer to AutoStick in this section for center stack.
further information) to select a lower gear. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift-
ing and heat buildup.
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
LOW (L) -- If Equipped
Use this range for engine braking when descending very steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downshift for increased engine braking. To access the LOW position, push down on the gear selector and rotate it fully clockwise.
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your will operate automatically, shifting between the eight
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has available gears. To engage AutoStick, simply tap one of 5 diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in
recur.
DRIVE or SPORT mode. In DRIVE mode, this will
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.
activate a temporary AutoStick mode. The transmission will revert back to normal operation after a period of time, depending on accelerator pedal activity. When the
AUTOSTICK -- IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
transmission gear selector is in the SPORT position, tapping either shift paddle will activate permanent AutoStick mode. The transmission will remain in AutoStick mode until the driver deliberately disables AutoStick (as described below). Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick will downshift the transmission to the next
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick will retain the current gear. When AutoStick is active, the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.
· If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is fully depressed, the transmission will downshift when possible (based on current vehicle speed and gear). Lack of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to automatic operation.
· If AutoStick is engaged while the transmission gear selector is in the SPORT position, manual gear selection will be maintained until the gear selector is returned to DRIVE, or as described below. The transmission will not upshift automatically at redline in this mode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor.
· In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current gear.
· The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
· You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear. Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in second gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
· If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
To disengage AutoStick mode, press and hold the (+) shift paddle until D or S is once again indicated in the instrument cluster. Shifting out of SPORT mode will also disable AutoStick. You can shift in or out of AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
· The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
WARNING!
5
of a vehicle speed.
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
· Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
speed.
personal injury.
· Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is engaged.
· The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected.
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
SPORT MODE -- IF EQUIPPED
provide improved throttle response and modified shifting for an enhanced driving experience, as well the greatest amount of steering feel. This mode may be activated and deactivated by pushing the Sport button on the instrument panel switch bank.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) -- IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear wheels as necessary.
Sport Mode Button
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast driving. The engine, transmission and steering systems are all set to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will
To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automatically defaults to rear-wheel drive (RWD) when road and environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental conditions require increased levels of road traction, the vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
AWD operation could be activated by outside temperature, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there
CAUTION!
may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
slip condition occurs). AWD can also be manually se- Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
lected by activating AutoStick mode (+/-), engaging size may cause failure of the front differential and/or
Sport Mode or activating the windshield wipers for an the transfer case.
extended period of time. Drive mode, RWD or AWD, can
be found in the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
5
to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Acceleration
NOTE: If the "SERVICE AWD SYSTEM" warning message appears after engine start up, or during driving, it means that the AWD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving) wheels.
Panel" for further information.
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
· Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
· Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible.
· Keep tires properly inflated.
· Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
· Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/ centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions and Warnings before doing so.
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
WARNING!
· Driving through standing water limits your vehicle's traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
· Driving through standing water limits your vehicle's braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through stand- 5 ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
· Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
· Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through
(Continued)
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. · Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water. · Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. · Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle's drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle's fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. · Getting water inside your vehicle's engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected service. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in
through the Uconnect System. Refer to "Customer Pro- "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further in-
grammable Features" or "Performance Control -- If formation.
Equipped" within "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
NOTE:
· Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
WARNING!
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial 5 increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers.
· If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is displayed and the "SERVICE POWER STEER- FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY ING" or the "POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF -- IF EQUIPPED
SERVICE SYSTEM" message is displayed This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting within the Driver Information Display (DID), this indi- off four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load cates the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever/gear selector in the PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park brake, firmly press the park brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position, the "Brake Warning Light" in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
NOTE:
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
· When the parking brake is applied and the transmis- the vehicle.
sion is placed in gear, the "Brake Warning Light" will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
WARNING!
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake · Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
before attempting to move the vehicle.
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
· This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage. · When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
5
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever/gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
Fob and lock your vehicle. · Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
· Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
· Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the "Brake Warning Light" remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function. There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation of the "Brake Warning Light".
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF), the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating.
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
(ERM). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high perfor- Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
mance braking system. The brake pads are a semi- Braking (RAB), and Rain Brake Support (RBS).
metallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
of brake pad is that the brakes may produce more brake This function manages the distribution of the braking 5
dust and may squeal slightly under certain weather and torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
operating conditions (i.e., during light brake applica- braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
tions) this is considered normal conditions.
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation
Brake System Warning Light
The red "Brake System Warning Light" will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the "Brake System Warning Light" remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the "Brake System Warning Light" does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
· The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop).
· The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
· Brake pedal pulsations.
· A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
WARNING!
· The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.
· Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.
· The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. · The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
5
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The amber "Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light" will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the "Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light" remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the "Brake System Warning Light" is not on.
If the "Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light" is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the "Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light" does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle's braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not "pump" the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
· The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue · HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
roll down the hill as normal.
will remain active.
5
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate:
WARNING!
· The feature must be enabled. · The vehicle must be stopped. · Park brake must be off. · Driver door must be closed. · The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver's responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
(Continued)
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued) brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
· If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
WARNING! (Continued)
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal. · HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. · Failure to follow these warnings may cause the vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide with another vehicle, object or person, and cause serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
Disabling And Enabling HSA
4. Start the engine.
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the 5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
current setting, proceed as follows:
turn to the left.
· For vehicles equipped with the Driver Information 6. Push the "ESC Off" button located in the lower switch
Display (DID), refer to "Driver Information Display bank below the climate control four times within
(DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for twenty seconds. The "ESC Off Indicator Light" should
further information.
turn on and turn off two times.
5
· If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to 7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
"Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instru- additional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.
ment Panel" for further information.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
For vehicles not equipped with the DID, perform the back to the ON position. If the sequence was com-
following steps:
pleted properly, the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
straight forward).
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
its previous setting.
3. Apply the parking brake.
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
· Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
· Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The "ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light" also flashes when the TCS is active. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light" begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
· Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
WARNING! (Continued)
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others. · Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the 5 steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
(Continued)
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC system may have multiple operating modes. ESC On
To enter the "Partial Off" mode, momentarily push the "ESC Off" switch and the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the "ESC Off" switch and the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will turn off.
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The "Partial Off" mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
WARNING!
When in "Partial Off" mode, the TCS functionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will be illuminated. When in "Partial Off" mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
NOTE:
"ESC OFF" message will display in the Driver Informa-
· For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Mul-
tion Display (DID). To turn ESC ON again, momentarily push the "ESC Off" switch.
tiple momentary button pushed may be required to NOTE: System may switch from ESC Full Off to Partial
return to ESC On.
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
· Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC system is in the "Partial Off" mode.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined speed the system will return to ESC Full Off.
5
· ESC Sport and ESC Track (If equipped) are ESC partial off mode(s).
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes if equipped.
Full Off If Equipped
WARNING!
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used on any public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the "Full Off" mode, push and hold the "ESC Off" switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will illuminate, and the
· In the ESC "Full Off" mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
(Continued)
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued) to assist in maintaining stability. "ESC Off" mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF Indicator Light
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It should go out with the engine running. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" also flashes when TCS is active. If the "ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light" begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
· The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" and the "ESC OFF Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
· Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
· The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in "Full Off"
The "ESC OFF Indicator Light" indicates the customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
mode (if equipped). Refer to "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in this section for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes.
5
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
WARNING!
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver's steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle's speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
(Continued)
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued) or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Rainy Brake Support (RBS)
Rainy Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rainy Brake Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings
1 -- U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 -- Size Designation 3 -- Service Description
4 -- Maximum Load
5 -- Maximum Pressure 6 -- Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
NOTE:
· P (Passenger) -- Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
· European -- Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have 5 the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter P is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
· LT (Light Truck) -- Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
· Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter "T" or "S" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
· High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
R means radial construction, or
D means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
5
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: · XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or · LL = Light load tire or · C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
5
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions Term
B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle's loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
5
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in "Vehicle Loading" in the "Starting And Operating" section of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to "Vehicle Loading" in the "Starting And Operating" sec-
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on your vehicle's placard.
tion of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
vehicle, locate the statement "The combined weight of 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas- 5
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
XXX kg" on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (294 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) = 650 lbs [294 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
NOTE:
· If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
· For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
TIRES -- GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: · Safety and Vehicle Stability · Economy
· Tread Wear
· Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
· Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.
· Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.
· Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.
· Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
WARNING! (Continued)
Fuel Economy
· Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle. · Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left. · Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
5
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
· Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
· Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
At least once a month:
· Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
· Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always "cold tire inflation pressure". Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
WARNING!
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high 75 mph (120 km/h). speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
5
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
WARNING!
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Repair
Tire Types
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:
· The tire has not been driven on when flat.
· The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
· The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.
All Season Tires -- If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires -- If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a "mountain/snowflake" symbol on the tire sidewall.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
5
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires -- If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Spare Tires -- If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to "Tire Service Kit" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited-use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel -- If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
Compact Spare Tire -- If Equipped
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
5
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
WARNING!
driver's side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter "T" or "S" preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 80D18 103M.
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
Full Size Spare -- If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare -- If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
Refer to "Freeing A Stuck Vehicle" in "What To Do In
Emergencies" for further information.
5
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 -- Worn Tire 2 -- New Tire
Tire Tread
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to "Replacement Tires" in this section for further information.
· Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:
· Driving style.
· Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
· Distance driven.
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
Replacement Tires
affect your vehicle's handling. If you ever replace a
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many wheel, make sure that the wheel's specifications match characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for those of the original wheels.
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu- It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
"Tread Wear Indicator". Refer to the Tire and Loading the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
WARNING!
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the "Tire Safety Information" section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
· Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
(Continued)
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. · Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. · Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage. · Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer. · Install on Rear Tires Only. · Due to limited clearance for a Rear Wheel Drive
(RWD) vehicle, on P215/65R17, P225/60R18 and
P235/55R18 tires with a Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction device or equivalent is recommended.
· Due to limited clearance for an All Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle, P235/55R19, 235/55R19 tires with the use of a traction device that meets the SAE type "Class S" specification is recommended.
· No other tire sizes are recommended for use with a tire chain or traction device.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: · Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious 5 damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use. · Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). · Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). · Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. · Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued) · Observe the traction device manufacturer's instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer's if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). · Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the "rearward cross" shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must 5 not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to "Tires General Information"
in "Starting And Operating" for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle's tires. The tire pressure will
Tire Rotation
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the sure.
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
mended cold placard pressure.
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
CAUTION!
· The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked. · After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
NOTE:
· The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
· The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
· Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes 5 the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
· The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
· Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
The TPMS consists of the following components: · Receiver module · Four TPM sensors · Various TPMS messages, which display in the Driver
Information Display (DID) · TPM Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the DID will display a LOW TIRE message and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values shown in a different color.
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
display in the DID will change color back to the original color, and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
5
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those shown in a different color in the DID graphic) to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure inflation value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the graphic
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the DID will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash, and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the DID will still display a pressure value in a different color.
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
addition, the DID will display a SERVICE TPM TPMS to receive this information.
SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
5
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID will
display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a (1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) (2) This device must accept any interference received,
in place of the pressure value.
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and tion.
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the DID will display a new pressure value instead of
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine -- If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded "Regular" gasoline having an octane rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane "Premium" gasoline will not provide any benefit over "Regular" gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine -- If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane "Plus" gasoline is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
CAUTION!
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid- DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-
ering service for the vehicle.
line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of 5
these blends may result in starting and drivability
Reformulated Gasoline
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as "Reformulated Gasoline". Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the "Malfunction Indicator Light" to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
· Operate in a lean mode.
· OBD II "Malfunction Indicator Light" on.
· Poor engine performance.
· Poor cold start and cold drivability.
· Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
that have these additives will help improve fuel Fuel System Cautions
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-
mance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline con-
CAUTION!
tains a higher level of detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When avail- Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle's
able the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
performance: · The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control sys- 5
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should tem.
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum · An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
and diaphragm materials.
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued) · The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: · Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. · Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) -- IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
5
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and non-Flexible Fuel powered vehicles.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit or products that can cause spark in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Requirements
NOTE:
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
When switching fuel types:
· Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
· Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and/or driveability problems during warm up.
· Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and rough idle following start up may be experienced even if the above recommendations are followed, especially when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
· Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline additive, such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
FCA Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that Cruising Range
engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to FCA US LLC engines.
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per liter and the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Starting The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
Replacement Parts All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
5
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time Ethanol compatible service components are required.
it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
CAUTION!
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel. Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may compatible components can damage your vehicle.
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability.
ADDING FUEL 1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver's door map pocket).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch 2. Open the fuel filler door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel when the fuel nozzle
"clicks" or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
Fuel Filler Door
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
6. Maintain nozzle in filler for 5 seconds to allow nozzle to drain.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for emergency refueling with a gas can.
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Funnel
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not "top off" the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
· Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled.
· Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the "Malfunction Indicator Light" to turn on.
· A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel filler door emergency release located in the trunk.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Follow the steps below to open the fuel door in case of an 3. Pull the release cable. emergency: 1. Open the trunk. 2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side inner
trim panel).
5
Access Cover
Release Cable VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the "Vehicle Certification Label". This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver's door.
The label contains the following information: · Name of manufacturer · Month and year of manufacture · Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) · Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front · Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear · Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) · Type of Vehicle · Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
WARNING! (Continued)
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Loading
Overloading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
5
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
front and rear GAWR.
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR.
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Common Towing Definitions
· Refer to the "Vehicle Certification Label" affixed to the rear of the driver's door for your vehicle's GVWR and GAWRs.
· Refer to the "Tire Placard" for your vehicle's proper tire pressure.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition.
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
WARNING!
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Tongue Weight (TW)
5
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
rear GAWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- Frontal Area
tion Label" in "Starting And Operating" for further The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
information.
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
· An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
5
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the "Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)" chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
3.6L Automatic 5.7L Automatic
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Max. Tongue Weight (See Note)
100 lbs (45 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the "Tire and Loading Information" placard. Refer to "Tire Safety Information" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Consider the following items when computing the
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
your bumper or trailer hitch.
· The tongue weight of the trailer.
· The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle.
· The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the 5 trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the "Tire And Loading Information" placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury collision. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible: · Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision. · When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
WARNING! (Continued)
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires. · Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners. · Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK. Always, block or chock the trailer wheels. · GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
WARNING! (Continued) · Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded:
1. Max loading as defined on the "Tire and Loading Information" placard.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized. (This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
CAUTION!
· Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
· Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps 5 the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Towing Requirements -- Tires
· Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.
· Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
"Tires General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for information on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures.
· Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
· Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for information on tread wear indicators and for the proper inspection procedure.
· When replacing tires, refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for information on replacement tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements -- Trailer Brakes
· Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
· An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.
· Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
WARNING!
· Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision.
· Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements -- Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.
5
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
1 -- Female Pins 2 -- Male Pin 3 -- Ground
Four-Pin Connector
4 -- Park 5 -- Left Stop/Turn 6 -- Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 -- Battery 2 -- Backup Lamps 3 -- Right Stop/Turn 4 -- Electric Brakes
5 -- Ground 6 -- Left Stop/Turn 7 -- Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
Towing Tips
Electronic Speed Control -- If Equipped
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
· Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
· When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The · Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid maximize fuel efficiency.
5
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick -- If Equipped
AutoStick shift control (if equipped) select a lower gear. · When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose "5" if the desired speed can be maintained. Choose "4" or "3" if needed to maintain the desired speed.
provide better engine braking.
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
· To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.
City Driving When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed. Highway Driving Reduce speed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .478 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .491
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 6
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .481 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .499
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .482 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . .501
Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models . . . . . . . . . .502
Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Without The Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
478 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel between the center air outlets.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action. · On the highways -- slow down. · In city traffic -- while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the · If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 479
· You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
WARNING!
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
from the engine cooling system.
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
CAUTION!
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads "H," WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
6
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
the "H," turn the engine off immediately and call for time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
service.
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
480 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque 130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m)
**Lug Nut/ Bolt Size
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/ Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 481
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Torque Patterns
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
WARNING!
· Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
· Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You 6 could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
· Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack.
· The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
(Continued)
482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued) lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
1. Open the trunk. 2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to access the jack.
Opening The Access Panel
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483
Spare Tire Fastener 4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
6
Jack Fastener 6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under
the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack assembly.
484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
WARNING!
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Place the gear selector into PARK. 5. Turn OFF the ignition. 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: · Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. · Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. · Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. · Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in REVERSE or FIRST gear. · Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack. · Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. · Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. · If working on or near a roadway, be extremely 6 careful of motor traffic.
Jack Warning Label
486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
Jacking Locations
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 487
Front Jacking Location
6
Rear Jacking Location 5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire. 7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Mounting Spare Tire
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 489
NOTE:
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
· For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a handle counterclockwise.
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare. 10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
· Refer to "Compact Spare Tire" and to "Limited-Use
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
Spare" under "Tires--General Information" in
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
"Starting and Operating" for additional warnings,
each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this
use, and operation.
section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug
them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
6
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
WARNING!
of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
4. Refer to Torque Specifications for proper lug nut torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. 6 It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jump-Start The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the engine compartment for jump-starting.
Remote Battery Post Locations 1 -- Remote Positive (+) Post 2 -- Remote Negative (-) Post
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493
WARNING!
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
· Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
WARNING!
moving fan blades. · Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.
· Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your Jump-Starting Procedure
6
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and cycle the ignition to OFF.
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 495
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
CAUTION!
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
starting.
6
3. Disconnect the positive (+) jumper cable from the FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
positive (+) post of the booster battery.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
vehicle.
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
496 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2 seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Push the ESC Off switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in Partial Off mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control" in "Starting And Operating" in your Owner's Manual on the DVD for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode.
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
CAUTION!
· When "rocking" a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
· Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 497
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis-
sion will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
6
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake, before activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
(Continued)
498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual Park Release lever.
4. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing it to the right.
Manual Park Release Lever Location
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the tether strap up through the opening in the console base.
Locking Tab Location
5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and rearward, until it locks in place in the vertical position. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 499
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side) rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and down, to its original position, until the locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
6
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Tether Strap Location
500 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground
Flat Tow
NONE
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Front Rear
ALL
RWD MODELS If transmission is operable:
· Transmission in NEUTRAL
· 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
· 30 miles (48 km) max distance
NOT RECOMMENDED (but, if used, same limita-
tions as above) NOT RECOMMENDED
BEST METHOD
AWD MODELS NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED, but, if used:
· Ignition in ON/RUN position
· Transmission in NEUTRAL (NOT in Park) BEST METHOD
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 501
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
CAUTION!
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- · DO NOT use sling-type equipment when towing.
ment manufacturer's instructions. Use of safety chains is Vehicle damage may occur.
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to · When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers attach to front or rear suspension components.
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
vehicles under tow must be observed.
towing.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
· The manufacturer does not recommend towing this vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
6
position, not the ACC position.
occur.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to Manual Park Release in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for towing.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, AWD models can also be towed with the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the transmission in NEUTRAL (not in PARK!), and the rear wheels OFF the ground with no
502 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
limitation on speed or distance. Since the ignition MUST be in the ON/RUN position to tow in this manner, AWD vehicles must be towed with ALL FOUR wheels OFF the ground (e.g. on a flatbed truck) if the Key Fob is unavailable.
CAUTION!
· Towing this vehicle using any other method can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage.
· Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, this vehicle may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
· The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to Manual Park Release in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the engine is off.
· The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
· The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of towing is with a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Without The Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only approved method of towing without the Key Fob is with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 503
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .508 ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .509 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM -- OBD II . .510
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .514
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 7 A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp . . . . . .563
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
All Wheel Drive (AWD) -- If Equipped . . . . .538 Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .547 Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .552
VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps . . .565 License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . .565 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566 Fluid Capacities -- 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566 Fluid Capacities -- 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Engine -- 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507
Engine -- 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
7
508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 3.6L
1 -- Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 2 -- Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 3 -- Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 4 -- Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 -- Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
6 -- Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 -- Air Cleaner Filter 8 -- Engine Oil Fill 9 -- Engine Oil Dipstick 10 -- Washer Fluid Reservoir
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 5.7L
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509
7
1 -- Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 2 -- Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 3 -- Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 4 -- Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 -- Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
6 -- Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 -- Air Cleaner Filter 8 -- Engine Oil Fill 9 -- Engine Oil Dipstick 10 -- Washer Fluid Reservoir
510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM -- OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)". It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
· Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
· If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and For further information, refer to "Privacy Practices" and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
"Uconnect CyberSecurity" in " All About Uconnect Ac-
cess" in your Owner's Manual Radio Supplement and
WARNING!
"Cybersecurity" in "Understanding Your Instrument
· ONLY an authorized service technician should con- Panel" in your Owner's Manual on the DVD.
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
PROGRAMS
· If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, it may: · Be possible that vehicle systems, including
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
7
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result
nance (I/M), this check verifies the "Malfunction
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
Indicator Light (MIL)" is functioning and is not
· Access, or allow others to access, information on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
stored in your vehicle systems, including per- system is ready for testing.
sonal information.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:
· The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.
· The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
WARNING!
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en- You can be badly injured working on or around a
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
7
and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
Limited Warranty.
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
DEALER SERVICE
chanic.
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed "Maintenance Schedule", there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
· Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center.
CAUTION! (Continued) · Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level -- 3.6L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515
regular intervals, such as once a month. The best time to Checking Oil Level -- 5.7L Engine
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
fully warmed engine is shut off.
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will regular intervals, such as once a month. The best time to
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the fully warmed engine is shut off.
dipstick. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
on these engines.
the oil level in the "SAFE" range. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0
CAUTION!
liter) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the "SAFE" range will result in an oil level at the top of the 7
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or "SAFE" range on these engines.
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity -- 3.6L Engine
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517
Engine Oil Viscosity -- 5.7L Engine
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the "Engine Com- engine oil filler cap location, refer to the "Engine Com-
partment" illustration in this section.
partment" illustration in this section.
7
NOTE: MOPAR SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to "Fuel
meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Saver Technology If Equipped" in "Starting And Oper-
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi- ating" for further information.
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
filter and are recommended.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in the "Maintenance Schedules" section for the proper maintenance intervals.
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine tenance required.
7
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to "JumpStarting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
serious personal injury.
520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Battery Location
WARNING! · Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. · Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. · Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. · The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521
CAUTION!
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
· It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
WARNING!
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. · If a "fast charger" is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a "fast charger" to provide starting voltage.
· Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, 7 for further warranty information.
· The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
Air Conditioner Maintenance
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician.
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a -- If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf -- If Equipped
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood, behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523
Access Door 2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
7 Filter Access Cover 3. Remove the used filter.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
A/C Air Filter 5. Close the filter access cover.
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525
Adding Washer Fluid
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula- fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
tions of salt or road film.
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use residual water.
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
from a dry windshield.
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
blades clean. This will help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
7
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering,
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of washer fluid when the message "Low Washer Fluid" appears in the Driver Information Display (DID).
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
· Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to "Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527
WARNING! (Continued) · A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
· The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
· Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
CAUTION! (Continued)
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- 7 portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
(Continued)
528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
· Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
· Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.
· Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
· When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position.
· You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the radiator for any
Cooling System -- Drain, Flush And Refill
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
face of the condenser.
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer.
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
leaks.
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and 7
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but MS.90032).
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. maintenance intervals.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
CAUTION!
· Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any "globally compatible" coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. · Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug the radiator. · This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc- · Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform- (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
Please review these recommendations for using Organic engine cooling system.
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) NOTE:
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
· It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the
· We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive operated.
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
· Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
7
· Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard needed to be added to the system, please contact your
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra- local authorized dealer.
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34°F (-37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer for assistance.
· Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
· Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
WARNING! (Continued)
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. · Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
spills immediately.
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
Coolant Level
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for Points To Remember
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
indicated on the bottle.
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
7
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
a month.
· Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
· Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.
· If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
· Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
· Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
· Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.
· Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Master Cylinder -- Brake Fluid Level Check
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Re-
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
fer to "Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
ure.
WARNING!
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
· Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
7
fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
"FULL" mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir. can severely damage your brake system and/or
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system.
impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
(Continued)
536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. · To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. · Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts" in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should may adversely affect seals.
be used.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac- the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
turer's recommended fluid may cause deterioration nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter Vehicle Limited Warranty.
shudder. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts" in this section for fluid specifications.
Fluid Level Check
Special Additives
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not 7 require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and check your transmission fluid level using special service
its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi- tools.
tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) -- If Equipped
The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and front differential. The exterior surface of these components should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks. Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in the middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer case fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole. Use this plug to add fluid as required.
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole.
Fluid Changes
Change Axle Fluid
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper
maintenance intervals.
maintenance intervals.
Rear Axle
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-
7
Fluid Level Check
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condiaxle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. underbody protection.
Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts" in
"Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are: · Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. · Stone and gravel impact. · Insects, tree sap and tar. · Salt in the air near seacoast localities. · Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
· Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
· If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
· Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
· Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541
CAUTION!
· Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
· Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
· If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
· If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
Special Care
· If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
· If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
7
a month.
· If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
· It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and · Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
open.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
· All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
· To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel's protective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure -- If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
· Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.
· Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543
· For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
· For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
· Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
protectants on Stain Repel products.
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
Interior Care
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
7
carpeting.
WARNING!
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION! Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win- Seat Belt Maintenance
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a mild
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
directly on the mirror.
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are buckles do not work properly.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
7
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
WARNING!
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
(Continued)
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
FUSES
WARNING! · When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
WARNING! (Continued)
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. · Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. · If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. · If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
(Continued)
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment. This module contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed on the inside of the power distribution center cover.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
CAUTION!
· When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
· When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If 7 a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Front Power Distribution Center
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity 1 2 3
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green 50 Amp Red
4
30 Amp Pink
5
40 Amp Green
6
30 Amp Pink
7
20 Amp Blue
8
20 Amp Blue
9
10
11
12
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red
Description Fuse Spare Radiator Fan #1 (Non 6.2L Supercharged) Electric Power Steering #1 If Equipped / Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) If
Equipped Starter
Electronic Stability Control Electronic Stability Control Police Ignition Run / ACC #1 Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2 All-Wheel Drive Module If Equipped Security If Equipped / Under hood Lamp
Police Horns Air Conditioning Clutch
Cavity 13 14 15 16 18 19
20 21
22
23 24
Cartridge Fuse
50 Amp Red 50 Amp Red
30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 20 Amp Blue Po-
lice 40 Amp Green / 20 Amp Blue Police
20 Amp Blue 20 Amp Blue
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
Description
Fuse Spare
Fuse Spare
Left HID If Equipped
Right HID If Equipped
Radiator Fan #2 (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
Electric Power Steering #2 If Equipped / Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged)
Wiper Motor
Headlamp Washers If Equipped
7
Police Bat Feed #2
Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Bat Feed # 3 Police Bat Feed # 1
Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed # 3
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity 28 29
Cartridge Fuse
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Mini-Fuse
15 Amp Blue
25 Amp Clear
25 Amp Clear 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red
Description Fuse Spare Transmission Control Module (Challenger/ Charger Police) / Electronic Shift Module (Challenger) Fuse Spare Engine Module Fuse Spare Fuse Spare Powertrain #1 Powertrain #2 Anti-Lock Brake Module Engine Controller / Rad Fan Relays (Charger/300) / Electric Power Steering Module (Charger/300) / Fuel Pump Relay (Charger/300) / 5Speed
Cavity 38 39
48
49 50 51 52 53
Cartridge Fuse
Mini-Fuse 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow 5 Amp Tan
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
Description Airbag Module EPS (Challenger) / EHPS (Police)/AC Clutch Relay / Vacuum Pump Relay / Fuel Pump Relay (Challenger) / Rad Fan Relays
(Challenger) AWD Module (Charger/300) / Front Axle
Disconnect (Charger/300) / Adaptive Cruise (Challenger) If Equipped Fuse Spare 7 Fuse Spare Vacuum Pump Adaptive Cruise (Charger/300) If Equipped Fuse Spare
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed on the inside of the power distribution center cover.
Rear Power Distribution Center
Opening The Access Cover
CAUTION!
· When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
· When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
7
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11
Cartridge Fuse 60 Amp Yellow
60 Amp Yellow 30 Amp Pink 20 Amp Blue Police 40 Amp Green 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink
12
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
Description Front PDC Feed #1 Fuse Spare Front PDC Feed #2 Sunroof/Dome Lamp Police
Exterior Lighting #1 Exterior Lighting #2 Interior Lighting Power Locks Driver Door Control Module Passenger Door Control Module Dual USB Center Console Rear/Cigar Lighter IP If Equipped
Cavity 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Cartridge Fuse 40 Amp Green 20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow Police 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
Description
HVAC Blower
Left Spot Lamp Police
Fuse Spare
Mod Network Interface Police
Fuse Spare
Fuse Spare
Fuel Pump
Right Spot Lamp Police
7
Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port
Integrated Center Stack
Tire Pressure Monitor
Cygnus Transmission Module (Charger/300)/Electronic Shift Module (Charger/300)
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity 27 31 32 33
Cartridge Fuse
34
35
36
37
38
40
Mini-Fuse 25 Amp Clear 25 Amp Breaker 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
5 Amp Tan 15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow
Description Amplifier If Equipped Power Seats If Equipped HVAC Module/Cluster Ignition Switch/RF Hub Module/Steering Column Lock (300) If Equipped Steering Column Module/ Clock (300) Battery Sensor Electronic Exhaust Valve If Equipped Radio Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest/Console Media Hub Fuse Spare
Cavity 41 42 43
44
45
46 47
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
Description
Fuse Spare
Rear Defrost
Comfort Seat And Steering Wheel Module (Heated Steering Wheel/RR Heated Seats)
Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear View Camera
Cluster / Rearview Mirror /
Compass (Charger/300) /
7
Humidity Sensor
Fuse Spare
Adaptive Front Lighting / Auto High BEAM / Day Time Running Lamps If Equipped
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity 48
Cartridge Fuse
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
Mini-Fuse 20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
Description Active Suspension If Equipped Fuse Spare Fuse Spare Front Heated Seats If Equipped Heated Cupholders/Rear Heated Seat Switches If Equipped HVAC Module/In Vehicle Temperature Sensor Fuse Spare Fuse Spare Fuse Spare Fuse Spare
Cavity 58 59 60
61 62 63 64 65 66 67
Cartridge Fuse
Mini-Fuse 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 5 Amp Tan
25 Amp Breaker 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
Description
Airbag Module
Adjustable Pedals Police
Heated Washer Nozzles (Charger)
Fuse Spare
Fuse Spare
Fuse Spare
Rear Windows (Charger/300)
Airbag Module
7
Fuse Spare
Rain and Light Sensor / Sun-
roof / Inside RR View Mirror
/ Power Outlet Illumination
(Center Console) / Police Run
Acc Relay
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity 68
69 70
Cartridge Fuse
Mini-Fuse 10 Amp Red
Description
Dual USB Power Outlet R/A Sense (Charger/300) Rear Sunshade (Charger/300)
Fuse Spare
Fuse Spare
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your battery.
· Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
· Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps
W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp
562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
578
Visor Vanity Lamps
A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp If Equipped
194
Door Courtesy
562
Shift Indicator Lamp
JKLE14140
7
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen Headlamp) Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon Headlamp) Front Turn Signal Lamp Front Park Lamp Daytime Running Lamp Front Fog Lamp If Equipped Front Sidemarker Lamp Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp Rear Sidemarker Lamp Backup Lamp Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) License Rear Fog Lamp If Equipped
Bulb Number 9005HL+
D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) PSY24WSV
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
BULB REPLACEMENT
WARNING!
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process.
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) -- If Equipped
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube. approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
7
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the ignition turned to the OFF
Standard Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp
position. Because of this, you should not attempt to 1. Open the hood.
service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the headlamp (outboard) bulb cap.
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to unlock it.
4. Twist the headlamp bulb assembly counterclockwise, and then pull it out of the headlamp assembly.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring assembly and install the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the hood.
6. Reinstall the bulb and wiring assembly into the headlamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
7. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp housing and rotate it clockwise to lock it.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the turn signal (inboard) bulb cap.
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to unlock it.
4. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and pull straight out from the lamp assembly.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring connector and install the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly straight into the lamp until it locks in place.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps
The Rear Backup and Turn Signal Lamp use LED sources that are not serviceable separately. The Rear Lamps must be replaced as an assembly, please see your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
7. Install the turn signal bulb cap in the headlamp The License Lamp uses an LED source that is not
housing and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
serviceable separately. The License Lamp must be re-
Front Fog Lamp
placed as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
7
The Front Fog Lamps use LED sources that are not
serviceable separately. The Front Fog Lamp must be The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are not service-
replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
able separately. The CHMSL Lamp must be replaced as
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not serviceable separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES Fluid Capacities -- 3.6L
Fuel (Approximate) 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol or up to 85% Ethanol for Flex Fuel (E85) Engine Engine Oil With Filter SAE 5W-20, API Certified Cooling System* MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S. 18.5 Gallons
6 Quarts 10 Quarts
Metric 69.9 Liters
5.6 Liters 9.5 Liters
Fluid Capacities -- 5.7L
Fuel (Approximate) 89 Octane Recommended 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol Engine Oil With Filter SAE 5W-20, API Certified Cooling System* MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent without Severe Duty II Cooling System MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent with Severe Duty II Cooling System * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
U.S. 18.5 Gallons
7 Quarts 14.5 Quarts 15 Quarts
Metric
69.9 Liters
6.6 Liters
13.9 Liters 7
14.3 Liters
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Important Information
CAUTION!
· Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any "globally compatible" coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. · Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. · This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Engine -- 3.6L Component Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 3.6L Engine Fuel Selection 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 En-
gine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for cor-
rect SAE grade.
7
We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
87 Octane, Up to 85% Ethanol.
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine -- 5.7L Component Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
89 Octane Recommended 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.
Chassis Component Automatic Transmission -- 8-Speed Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Front Axle Rear Axle Transfer Case
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. We recommend you use MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lu- 7 bricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5). We recommend you use MOPAR OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5). We recommend you use MOPAR Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 4440.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
8
574 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when the "Change Oil" or "Oil Change Required" message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
The "Oil Change Required" message will be displayed in the DID and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under "Driver Information Dispay (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 575
Required Maintenance Intervals:
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is page for the required maintenance intervals.
operated predominantly at idle or only very low engine RPM's. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: · Check engine oil level.
· Change oil and filter · Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service
· Check windshield washer fluid level.
· Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
· Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
required · Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
8
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
and park brake
· Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and power steering (if equipped) and
· Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses · Inspect exhaust system
fill as needed.
· Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
· Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
off-road conditions
576 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance Chart
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers:
32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals, and replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
X
X
X
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 577
20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers:
32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
X
X
X
X
X
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replace spark plugs.**
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X
X8
Inspect the transfer case fluid. Change the transfer
case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
X
X
trailer towing. (All Wheel Drive Only).
578 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers:
32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000
Change the rear axle fluid and on models
equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the
X
X
X
following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
· You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
· Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 579
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .587
FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .584 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .584
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 9
In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585 In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . . . . . .585 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .588
582 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590 Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 583
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests
YOUR VEHICLE
If you list a number of items and you must have your
Prepare For The Appointment
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. 9
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the
584 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process. · If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.
· If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information: · Owner's name and address
· Owner's telephone number (home and office)
· Authorized dealer name · Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) · Vehicle delivery date and mileage FCA US LLC Customer Center P.O. Box 218004 Auburn Hills, MI 483218004 Phone: (800) 247-9753 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Sante Fe C.P. 05109 Mexico, D. F. In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC P.O. Box 191857 San Juan 00919-1857 Tel.: (787) 782-5757 Fax: (787) 782-3345
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 585
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
9
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited
586 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.
WARNING!
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 587
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer.
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could In Canada
9
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
588 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 589
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.
Call toll free at: · 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) · 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: · www.techauthority.com
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For 9 example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
590 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 591
9
INDEX
10
594 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400, 402 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .178 Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .530 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Adjust
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61, 63 Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 101, 273 Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .519 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348, 522 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips. . . . . . . . . . .347, 349 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521, 522 Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345, 521 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
INDEX 595
Alarm
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . .338, 345
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384, 538
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 276 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538, 568, 571
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
All Wheel Drive
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536, 537
All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394, 538 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 571
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530, 566 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Autostick
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 AWD
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 571 10
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 571
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
596 INDEX
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277, 519 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .25 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Beverage Holder Cooled (Cupholder) . . . . . . . . . . .252 Beverage Holder Heated (Cupholder) . . . . . . . . . . .252 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 571 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402, 534
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535, 568, 571 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274, 402 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560, 563 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 560
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566 Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 454 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540 Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
INDEX 597
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Cleaning
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .511 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Child Restraints
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Connector
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .91 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .334
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .90 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .84 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .532
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .80 Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 10
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528, 533
598 INDEX
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530, 566, 568, 569, 570 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298, 300 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252, 546 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514, 515 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock -- Rear Doors . . . . . .35 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 31 Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Key Fob Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
INDEX 599
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .547
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Electronic Speed Control
Driver Information Display
(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174, 175, 178
DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303, 306 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .303, 306 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .279
Driver Information Display (DID)
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Driver Information Display (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Emergency, In Case Of
Driving
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491, 492, 493
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .511 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 10
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
600 INDEX
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514, 515 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508, 509 Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . .528, 568, 569, 570 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 454 Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491, 492, 493 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514, 566, 568, 569, 570 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516, 566 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451, 455 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 454 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 526 Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348, 522 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518, 568, 569, 570 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Flashers Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 158, 297
INDEX 601
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .568
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157, 283
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455, 456 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451, 455
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 571 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450, 568, 569, 570
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 569, 570 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566 10
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514, 515 Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
602 INDEX
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . .234, 241 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Gauges
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 465 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 464 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Hazard Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .159 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 166 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 143 Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 143 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .159 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Hitches Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
INDEX 603
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481, 485 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491, 492, 493
Ignition
Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 25
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . .269, 276, 281, 294, 297 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 25
Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543 Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 377 10
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Lock The Vehicle's Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 328
604 INDEX
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 328 Unlock From The Driver's Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 560 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 152
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 101, 273 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274, 402 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563 Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298, 300 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .157, 159 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157, 283 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152, 563 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 166 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
INDEX 605
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .276, 297 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461, 463 Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .284 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .163 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 296 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 232 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560, 563 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .288, 443 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 10 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 157, 158, 297 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
606 INDEX
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .284, 511 Manual Park Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 MOPAR Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513, 587
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . .450, 568, 569, 570 Oil, Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303, 514, 568, 569, 570
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514, 515 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514, 515 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518, 568, 569, 570 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516, 566
INDEX 607
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517, 566 Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .424 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 Power Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Operator Manual (Owner's Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 588 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .247 Paddle Shifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Paddle Shift Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 10 ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Power Seats Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
608 INDEX
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Pretensioners Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .22
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .532 Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 19, 27, 31, 41 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Rear Wheel Drive
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
INDEX 609
Remote Control
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 25 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 25 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 143
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .336 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Remote Starting
RWD
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 10
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . . .330 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
610 INDEX
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .55 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .58 Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 101
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .55 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 50, 53 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 135, 138, 139 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 135 Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 143 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137, 138, 139 Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
INDEX 611
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 158, 297
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434, 435, 436, 482
Security Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 276 Spark Plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 569, 570
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Specifications
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . .568, 569, 570 Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 569, 570
SENTRY KEY
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 569, 570
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Speed Control
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176, 177
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585 Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Setting The Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .174, 175, 178 10
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381, 384 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 376
612 INDEX
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Steering Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 169 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 169 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .336 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347, 560 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .61 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Telescoping Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 169 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC). . . . . . .338, 345 Tilt
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Tilt Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 169 Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .423, 424 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 428, 434, 589 Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
INDEX 613
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481, 485, 490 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428, 434 Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481, 484, 485 To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423, 424 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .476 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439, 490 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417, 428 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 10 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434, 436, 482 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
614 INDEX
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538, 568, 571 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384, 536 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536, 568, 571 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .25 Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 25 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 46 Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158, 297
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .330 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 24, 330 Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 Siri Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 Uconnect Access Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 34 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . .36, 328 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 328
INDEX 615
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 Washer Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .334 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165, 525 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Water Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424, 461, 463 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 246 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347, 560 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 10 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164, 165 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .287 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
616 INDEX
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle's electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle's electronic systems.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
116UC4F8-112-162-A6-AAB ©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
SecFoirnsdt Edition Printed in U.S.A.
Acrobat Distiller 8.0.0 (Windows)